HP Compaq nx7000 Maintenance And Service Manual
Main tenan ce and Ser vice Gu id e HP P a v ili on W ide sc r een Notebook zt3 000 HP C ompaq Bu siness Notebook nx7 000 C ompaq Pr es ar io W ide sc r een Notebook P C X1000 Doc u ment P art Number: 3 2 5 3 8 8-00 2 October 200 3 This guide is a troubleshooting reference used for maintaining and servicing the notebook. It provides comprehensi ve information on identifying notebook features, components, and spare parts, troubleshooting notebook problems, and performing notebook disassembly procedures. 325388-002.book Page i Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
© 2003 He wlett-Packard De velopment Company , L.P . Microsoft® and W indows® are U.S. re gistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel®, Pentium®, an d SpeedStep® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor . Bluetooth® is a trademark o wned by its proprietor and used b y He wlett-Packard Compan y under license. The information contained herein is su bject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompan ying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty . HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Maintenance and S erv ice Gui de HP P av i lio n Wi descr een Notebook zt3000 HP Co mpaq Busine ss Not ebook nx7 000 Co mpaq Pr esar io W ides cr een Notebook P C X1000 Second E dition October 200 3 F irst E dition Jul y 2003 Document P art Nu mber: 3 25 38 8-002 325388-002.book Page ii Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide iii Cont ent s 1 Product Description 1.1 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â2 1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â22 1.3 Clearing a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â24 1.4 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â25 1.5 External Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â26 1.6 Design Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â36 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Computer Setup and Diagnostics Utilities . . . . . . . . 2â1 Using Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2 Selecting from the File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3 Selecting from the Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â4 Selecting from the Advanced Me nu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â5 2.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â7 3 Illustrated Parts Catalog 3.1 Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â1 3.2 Notebook Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2 3.3 Miscellaneous Plastics Kit Components . . . . . . . . . 3â10 3.4 Miscellaneous Cable Kit Components . . . . . . . . . . 3â12 3.5 Miscellaneous Doors/Covers Kit Components . . . . 3â13 3.6 Mass Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â14 3.7 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â15 325388-002.book Page iii Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
i v Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Cont en ts 4 Removal and Replacement Preliminaries 4.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â1 4.2 Service Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Plastic Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 4.3 Preventing Damage to Removable Drives . . . . . . . . 4â3 4.4 Preventing Electrostatic Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â4 4.5 Packaging and Transporting Precautions . . . . . . . . . 4â4 4.6 Workstation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â5 4.7 Grounding Equipment and Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â6 5 Removal and Replacement Procedures 5.1 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â2 5.2 Disassembly Sequence Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â3 5.3 Preparing the Notebook for Di sassembly . . . . . . . . . 5â4 5.4 Notebook Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â8 5.5 Memory Expansion Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â9 5.6 Mini PCI Communications Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â11 5.7 RTC Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â13 5.8 Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â14 5.9 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â15 5.10 Switch Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â18 5.11 Speaker Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â19 5.12 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â21 5.13 Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â22 5.14 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â24 5.15 Display Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â26 5.16 Top Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â30 5.17 Bluetooth Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â36 5.18 SD Card Slot Board and Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â38 5.19 VGA Board and Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â40 5.20 Modem and Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â42 5.21 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â44 325388-002.book Page iv Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Cont en ts Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide v 6 Specifications A Connector Pin Assignments B Power Cord Set Requirements 3-Conductor Power Cord Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ1 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ1 Country-Specific Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ2 C Screw Listing Index 325388-002.book Page v Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â1 1 Pr oduc t D esc ription The HP Pa vilion W idescreen Notebook zt3000, HP Compaq Business Notebook nx7000, and Compaq Presario W idescreen Notebook PC X1000 of fer adv anced modularity , a Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor-M processor with 64-bit architecture, industry-leading A T I MOBILITY RADEON Accelerated Graphics Port (A GP) implementation, and extensi ve multimedia support. HP P av ilion W idesc reen Not ebook zt3000, HP Co mpaq Busine ss Not ebook nx7 000, and Co mpaq Pr esar io W ides cr een Notebook P C X1000 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
1â2 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1.1 M o d e l s Notebook models are sho wn in T ables 1-1 through 1-4. Ta b l e 1 - 1 HP P avilion zt3000, HP Compaq nx7000, and Compaq Presario X1000 Model Naming Con ventions Key C P 170 Y5 80 Y Ci 10 P XXXXXX-XXX 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 Ke y Description Options 1 Brand/Series designator V = HP P avilion zt3000 C = HP Compaq nx7000 P = Compaq Presario X1000 2 Processor type P = Mobile In tel P entium 4 Processor-M 3 Processor speed 170 = 1.7 GHz 160 = 1.6 GHz 150 = 1.5 GHz 140 = 1.4 GHz 130 = 1.3 GHz 4D i s p l a y t y p e / size/resolution Z = wide UXGA (1920 à 1200) Y = wide SXGA (1680 à 1050) W = wide XGA (1280 à 800) 5 = 15.4 in 5 Hard drive size 80 = 80 GB 60 = 60 GB 40 = 40 GB 6 Optical drive designator C = CD-R OM D = D VD-ROM Y = D VD RW W = D VD/CD-RW combo drive 7 Integrated communication/ wireless de vice C = combination LAN/modem b = 802.11b i = 802.11b Bluetooth® 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â3 Ta b l e 1 - 1 HP P avilion zt3000, HP Compaq nx7000, and Compaq Presario X1000 Model Naming Con vention (Continued) 8 RAM 10 = 1024 MB 51 = 512 MB 25 = 256 MB 9 Operating system H = Microsoft® Windows® XP Home P = Windows XP Pro 10 SKU# Ta b l e 1 - 2 HP P avilion zt3000 Models All HP Compaq nx7000 models f eature: â T ouchP ad pointing de vice â 8-cell, 4.4-wH lithium io n (Li-Ion) batter y pack â 1-year w a rranty on par ts and labor V P 170 Y5 80 Y Cb 51 H Asia P acific DR255A UUF V P 160 Y5 80 Y Cb 51 H Asia P acific DR260A UUF V P 160 Y5 80 Y Cb 25 H T aiw an DR253A AB0 and DR258A AB0 V P 160 Y5 80 W Ci 51 P K orea DR248A AB1 V P 160 Y5 60 Y Ci 51 H Hong K ong DR249A AB5 Thailand DR250A AKL V P 160 Y5 60 Y Ci 51 P A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DR244A ABG 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
1â4 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion V P 160 Y5 60 W Ci 51 P K orea DR247A AB1 V P 160 Y5 40 W Cb 25 H Asia P acific DR254A UUF T aiwan DR256A AB0 V P 160 W5 60 Y Cb 51 H Greece DP778E AB7 Switz er land DP778E UUZ V P 160 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Hong K ong DR257A AB5 Thailand DR257A AKL V P 150 Y5 40 W Ci 25 P P eopleâ s Republic of China DR245A AB2 V P 150 W5 80 Y Cb 51 H United States DM779A ABA V P 150 W5 60 Y Cb 51 H United States DM778A ABA V P 150 W5 40 Y Cb 51 H Switzerland DP777E UUZ V P 150 W5 40 Y Cb 25 H T aiw an DR252A AB0 V P 150 W5 40 Y Cn 51 P A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DR243A ABG V P 150 W5 40 W Cb 51 H Denmark Europe Ger many Italy DP779E AB Y DP779E ABB DP782E ABD DP779E ABZ The Netherlands Saudi Arabia Spain United Kingdom DP783E ABH DP779E ABV DP779E ABE DP779E ABU Ta b l e 1 - 2 HP P avilion zt3000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â5 V P 150 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Asia P acific DR259A UUF V P 140 W5 80 Y Cb 51 P Latin America DR205A ABM V P 140 W5 60 W Cb 51 H United States DM781A ABA V P 140 W5 40 Y Cb 51 H F rance DP786E ABF V P 140 W5 40 W Cb 51 H Fr a n c e Norwa y Ger many United States DP784E ABF DP785E ABN DM781E ABD DM783A ABA V P 140 W5 40 W Cb 51 P Latin America DR204A ABM V P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Belgium Denmark Fr a n c e Europe Greece Italy The Netherlands DP776E UUG DP776E AB Y DP776E ABF DP776E ABB DP776E AB7 DP776E ABZ DP776E ABH Norwa y P or tugal Saudi Arabia Spain Switzerland United Kingdom United States DP776E ABN DP776E AB9 DP776E ABV DP776E ABE DP776E UUZ DP776E ABU DP479U ABA V P 140 W5 40 W Ci 25 P K orea DR246A AB1 V P 140 W5 40 W Cn 25 P A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DR242A ABG V P 140 W5 40 D Cb 25 H T aiw an DR251A AB0 Ta b l e 1 - 2 HP P avilion zt3000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
1â6 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion Ta b l e 1 - 3 HP Compaq nx7000 Models All HP Compaq nx7000 models f eature: â T ouchP ad pointing de vice â 8-cell, 4.4-wH Li-Ion batter y pack â 1-year w a rranty on par ts and labor C P 160 Y5 80 W Cb 51 P K orea DM942A AB1 C P 160 Y5 60 Y Ci 51 P F rance DG706T ABF C P 160 Y5 60 W Cb 51 P Belgium Czech Repub lic Denmark European Inter national Fr a n c e Ger many Greece Hungar y Israel Italy Jap a n DG706A UUG DG706A AKB DG706A ABY DG706A ABB DG706A ABF DG706A ABD DG706A AB7 DG706A AKC DG706A ABT DG706A ABZ DM436A ABJ The Netherlands Norwa y Po l a n d P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov enia Spain Sweden/Finland Switzerland Tu r k e y United Kingdom DG706A ABH DG706A ABN DG706A AKD DG706A AB9 DG706A ACB DG706A AB V DG706A AKN DG706A ABE DG706A AK8 DG706A UUZ DG706A AB8 DG706A AB U C P 160 Y5 60 W Ci 51 P Hong K ong DR758P AB5 C P 160 W5 80 W Cb 51 H T aiw an DR749P AB0 C P 160 W5 80 W Cb 51 P Asia P acific Ta i w a n DR752P UUF DR748P AB0 Thailand DR752P AKL C P 160 W5 60 Y Cb 51 P Thailand DM434A AKL 325388-002.book Page 6 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â7 C P 160 W5 60 W Cb 51 P Asia P acific Brazil F rench Canada DM945A UUF and DL855A UUF DL855A AC4 DL855A ABC Jap a n Latin America Thailand United States DL855A ABJ DL855A ABM DM945A AKL DL855A ABA C P 160 W5 40 D Cb 25 P T aiw an DN896A AB0 P eopleâ s Republic of China DS303P AB2 C P 160 W5 40 D CN 25 P Latin America DP093A ABM United States DP093A ABA C P 150 Y5 80 W Cb 51 P A ustralia DR764P ABG C P 150 Y5 80 W Ci 51 P A ustralia DR760P ABG C P 150 Y5 60 W Cb 51 P Asia P acific DN894A UUF K orea DM941A AB1 C P 150 Y5 60 W Cb 25 P Hong K ong DR757P AB5 C P 150 Y5 60 W Ci 25 P Hong K ong DS304P AB5 C P 150 Y5 40 W Cb 25 P A ustralia DR762P ABG C P 150 Y5 40 W Ci 51 H Europe DJ223S ABB Ta b l e 1 - 3 HP Compaq nx7000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 7 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
1â8 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion C P 150 Y5 40 W Ci 51 P Belgium Czech Repub lic Denmark Europe Fr a n c e Ger many Greece Hungar y Israel Italy The Netherlands DG705A UUG DG705A AKB DG705A ABY DG705A ABB DG705A ABF and DG705T ABF DG705A ABD and DG705T ABD DG705A AB7 DG705A AKC DG705A ABT DG705A ABZ DG705A ABH Norwa y Po l a n d P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov enia Spain Sweden/Finland Switzerland Tu r k e y United Kingdom DG705A ABN DG705A AKD DG705A AB9 DG705A ACB DG705A AB V DG705A AKN DG705A ABE and DG705T ABE DG705A AK8 DG705A UUZ DG705A AB8 DG705A AB U and DG705T ABU C P 150 Y5 40 W Ci 25 P Italy DJ218S ABZ C P 150 Y5 40 C Cb 51 P K orea DM940A AB1 C P 150 W5 80 W Cb 51 H Asia P acific A ustralia/Ne w Zealand Jap a n DL848A UUF DL848A ABG DL848A ABJ Ko r e a Ta i w a n Thailand DL848A AB1 DL850A AB0 DL848A AKL C P 150 W5 80 W Cb 51 P Asia P acific A ustralia/Ne w Zealand Jap a n DL847A UUF DL847A ABG DL847A ABJ Ko r e a Ta i w a n Thailand DL847A AB1 DL849A AB0 DL847A AKL C P 150 W5 80 W Cb 25 P Asia P acific DM943A UUF C P 150 W5 60 W Cb 25 H T aiw an DR747P AB0 Ta b l e 1 - 3 HP Compaq nx7000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 8 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â9 C P 150 W5 60 W Cb 25 P P eopleâ s Republic of China DS302P AB2 T aiwan DR746P AB0 C P 150 W5 40 W Cb 51 H Switzerland DJ169S UUZ C P 150 W5 40 W Cb 51 P Asia P acific DN728A UUF C P 150 W5 40 W Cb 25 P Asia P acific DM944A UUF Austr alia DS312P ABG C P 150 W5 40 D Cb 25 H T aiwan DL842A AB0 C P 150 W5 40 D Cb 25 P P eopleâ s Republic of China DQ885P AB2, DL838A AB2, and DS301P AB2 C P 140 Y5 60 W Cb 25 P A ustralia DR759P ABG C P 140 Y5 40 W Cb 51 P K orea DM939A AB1 C P 140 Y5 40 W Cb 25 P A ustralia DR763P ABG Hong K ong DR756P AB5 C P 140 Y5 40 D Cb 25 P A ustralia DR761P ABG C P 140 Y5 30 W Cb 25 H Hong K ong DR755P AB5 Ta b l e 1 - 3 HP Compaq nx7000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 9 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
1â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion C P 140 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Sweden DJ200S AK8 C P 140 W5 60 W Cb 25 H Asia P acific A ustralia/Ne w Zealand Hong K ong Jap a n DL844A UUF DL844A ABG DM437A AB5 DL844A ABJ Ko r e a Ta i w a n Thailand DL844A AB1 DL846A AB0 DL844A AKL C P 140 W5 60 W Cb 25 P Asia P acific A ustralia/Ne w Zealand Jap a n DL843A UUF DL843A ABG DL843A ABJ Ko r e a Ta i w a n Thailand DL843A AB1 DL845A AB0 DL843A AKL C P 140 W5 60 W Ci 51 P Asia P acific DL853A UUF Hong K ong DL853A ABF C P 140 W5 60 W Nb 51 H Europe DQ822C ABB C P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Japan DM435A ABJ T aiwan DR750P AB0 C P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 P Thailand DM433A AKL C P 140 W5 40 W Ci 51 H Ger many DJ202S ABD Ta b l e 1 - 3 HP Compaq nx7000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 10 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â11 C P 140 W5 40 W Ci 25 P Belgium Czech Repub lic Denmark Europe Fr a n c e Ger many Greece Hungar y Israel DG704A UUG and DG704T UUG DG704A AKB DG704A ABY DG704A ABB DG704A ABF , DG704T ABF , and DJ231S ABF DG420A ABD DG704A AB7 DG704A AKC DG704A ABT Italy The Netherlands Norwa y Po l a n d P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov enia Spain Sweden/Finland Switzerland Tu r k e y United Kingdom DG704A ABZ DG704A ABH DG704A ABN DG704A AKD DG704A AB9 DG704A ACB DG704A AB V DG704A AKN DG704A ABE DG704A AK8 DG704A UUZ DG704A AB8 DG704A AB U C P 140 W5 40 W Cn 25 P Brazil Latin America DP094A AC4 DP094A ABM United States DP094A ABA C P 140 W5 40 D Cb 51 P Brazil F rench Canada DL854A AC4 DL854A ABC Latin America United States DL854A ABM DL854A ABA and DP076C ABA C P 140 W5 40 D Cb 25 H Hong K ong DR754P AB5 T aiwan DR745P AB0 C P 140 W5 40 D Cb 25 P Asia P acific A ustralia Ko r e a P eopleâ s Republic of China DM438A UUF DS311P ABG DM938A AB1 DL837A AB2 and DM438A AB2 Ta i w a n Thailand DR744P AB0 and DR751P AB0 DM438A AKL Ta b l e 1 - 3 HP Compaq nx7000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 11 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion C P 140 W5 40 C Cb 25 P Asia P acific DR850P UUF K orea DM937A AB1 C P 140 W5 30 D Cb 25 H Hong K ong DR753P AB5 C P 130 Y5 80 W Cb 51 P United States DP113S ABA C P 130 Y5 40 W Cb 51 P United States DP119S ABA C P 130 W5 40 W Cb 25 P T aiwan DN893A AB0 C P 130 W5 40 W Ci 25 P Asia P acific DL852A UUF Hong K ong DL852A AB5 C P 130 W5 40 D Cb 25 H Asia P acific A ustralia/Ne w Zealand Hong K ong DL840A UUF DL840A ABG DL840A AB5 Jap a n Ko r e a Thailand DL840A ABJ DL840A AB1 DL840A AKL C P 130 W5 40 D Cb 25 P Asia P acific A ustralia/Ne w Zealand Hong K ong Jap a n Ja pan (English) Ko r e a DL839A UUF DL839A ABG DL839A AB5 DL839A ABJ DL839A ACF DL839A AB1 and DM936A AB1 Ta i w a n Thailand United States DL841A AB0 and DN895A AB0 DL839A AKL DH904A ABA C P 130 W5 40 D Ci 25 P Asia P acific DL851A UUF Hong K ong DL851A AB5 C P 130 W5 40 C Cb 25 P Asia P acific DR852P UUF K orea DM935A AB1 Ta b l e 1 - 3 HP Compaq nx7000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 12 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â13 Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models All Compaq Presario X1000 models feature: â T ouchPad pointing de vice â 8-cell, 4.4-wH Li-Ion batter y pack â 1-year w a rranty on par ts and labor X1094 P 160 Y5 80 Y Cb 51 H A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DR824A ABG X1082 P 160 Y5 80 Y Cb 51 H A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DR278A ABG X1064 P 160 Y5 80 Y Ci 51 H K orea DN625A AB1 X1081 P 160 Y5 80 W Cb 51 H A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DR277A ABG Asia P acific DR277A UUF X1045 P 160 Y5 80 W Cb 51 H Asia P acific DN601A UUF K orea DN606A AB1 X1030 P 160 Y5 60 Y Cb 51 H A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DN591A ABG X1071 P 160 Y5 60 Y Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DQ977A AB2 X1046 P 160 Y5 60 W Cb 51 H K orea DN607A AB1 X1029 P 160 Y5 60 W Cb 25 H A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DN600A ABG X1073 P 160 Y5 60 W Ci 51 H Hong K ong DR269A AB5 K orea DR269A AB1 325388-002.book Page 13 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion X1070 P 160 Y5 60 D Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DQ976A AB2 X1074 P 160 Y5 60 D Ci 51 H Hong K ong DR270A AB5 X1091 P 160 Y5 40 W Ci 25 H K orea DR287A AB1 X1093 P 160 W5 80 Y Cb 51 H A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DR823A ABG X1097 P 160 W5 8 0 W Ci 51 H A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DR824A ABG X1140 P 160 W5 60 Y Cb 51 H United Kingdom DP772E AB U X1155 P 160 W5 6 0 Y Ci 51 H Sweden DP775E AK8 X1090 P 160 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Asia P acific DR286A UUF X1076 P 160 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Asia P acific DR272A UUF X1066 P 150 Z5 80 Y Ci 51 H Asia P acific DN627A UUF X1015 P 150 Y5 80 Y Cb 10 H United States DN624A ABA X1086 P 150 Y5 80 Y Cb 51 H Hong K ong DR282A AB5 Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 14 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â15 X1085 P 150 Y5 80 W Cb 51 H Hong K ong DR281A AB5 X1056 P 150 Y5 60 Y Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DN617A AB2 X1049 P 150 Y5 60 W Cb 51 H Hong K ong DN610A AB5 X1023 P 150 Y5 60 W Cb 51 H Asia P acific DN584A UUF X1069 P 150 Y5 60 W Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DQ975A AB2 X1084 P 150 Y5 60 W Ci 25 H K orea DR280A AB1 X1055 P 150 Y5 60 D Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DN616A AB2 X1040 P 150 W5 80 Y Cb 51 H United States DM774A ABA X1089 P 150 W5 80 W Cb 51 H T aiwan DR285A AB0 X1050 P 150 W5 60 Y Cb 51 H Hong K ong DN611A AB5 X1020 P 150 W5 60 Y Cb 51 H The Netherlands DM416A ABH X1088 P 150 W5 60 W Cb 51 H T aiwan DR284A AB0 Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 15 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion X1079 P 150 W5 60 W Cb 51 H T aiwan DR275A AB0 X1044 P 150 W5 60 W Cb 51 H K orea DN605A AB1 X1032 P 150 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Asia P acific DN593A UUF X1058 P 150 W5 60 W Cb 25 H K orea DN619A AB1 X1054 P 150 W5 60 W Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DN615A AB2 X1010 P 150 W5 40 W Cb 51 H Denmark P or tugal DL963A ABY DL963A AB9 Spain United Kingdom DL963A ABE DL963A ABU X1068 P 150 W5 40 W Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DQ974A AB2 X1028 P 150 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Asia P acific DN589A UUF X1067 P 150 W5 40 D Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DQ973A AB2 X1020 P 140 Y5 80 Y Cb 10 P United States DK572A ABA X1063 P 140 Y5 60 W Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DN623A AB2 Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 16 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â17 X1022 P 140 Y5 60 W Cb 25 H Asia P acific DN583A UUF X1065 P 140 Y5 60 W Ci 25 H Asia P acific DN626A UUF X1048 P 140 Y5 40 W Cb 25 H Hong K ong DN609A AB5 X1083 P 140 Y5 40 W Ci 25 H Asia P acific DR279A UUF K orea DR279A AB1 X1095 P 140 Y5 40 C Cb 25 H Asia P acific DR825A UUF X1028 P 140 W5 80 Y Cb 51 P United States DL898A ABA X1037 P 140 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Thailand DN598A AKL X1036 P 140 W5 60 W Cb 51 H T aiwan DN597A AB0 X1018 P 140 W5 60 W Cb 51 H United States DK574A ABA X1010 P 140 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Canada (English) DL857A ABL F rench Canada DL857A ABC X1007 P 140 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Sweden/Finland DL964A AK8 X1001 P 140 W5 60 W Cb 51 H United States DK575A ABA Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 17 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion X1057 P 140 W5 60 W Cb 25 H K orea DN618A AB1 X1053 P 140 W5 60 W Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DN614A AB2 X1092 P 140 W5 6 0 W Ci 25 H K orea DR822A AB1 X1087 P 140 W5 60 D Cb 51 H T aiwan DR283A AB0 X1078 P 140 W5 60 D Cb 51 H T aiwan DR274A AB0 X1043 P 140 W5 40 Y Cb 51 H K orea DN604A AB1 X1016 P 140 W5 40 Y Cb 51 H F rance DM415A ABF Italy DM415A ABZ X1110 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 51 H Sweden DP773E AK8 X1080 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 51 H Thailand DR276A AKL X1062 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 51 H Asia P acific DN622A UUF X1030 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 51 H United States DM773A ABA X1012 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 51 H F rance DL965A ABF Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 18 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â19 X1105 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H United Kingdom DP771E AB U X1077 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H T aiwan DR273A AB0 X1075 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Asia P acific DR271A UUF X1052 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DN613A AB2 X1050 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Canada English F rench Canada DP485U ABL DP485U ABC United States DM777A ABA X1042 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H K orea DN603A AB1 X1002 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H United States DM771A ABA X1115 P 140 W5 4 0 W Ci 51 H Sweden DP774E AK8 X1096 P 140 W5 4 0 W Ci 25 H Asia P acific DR826A UUF T aiwan DR826A AB0 X1051 P 140 W5 40 D Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DN612A AB2 X1072 P 140 W5 30 W Cb 25 H Hong K ong DR268A AB5 X1021 P 130 Y5 40 D Cb 25 H Asia P acific DN582A UUF Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 19 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion X1038 P 130 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Thailand DN599A AKL X1010 P 130 W5 60 W Cb 51 H United States DK571A ABA X1035 P 130 W5 60 D Cb 51 H T aiwan DN596A AB0 X1006 P 130 W5 40 Y Cb 51 H F rance DM933A ABF X1060 P 130 W5 40 W Cb 51 H Thailand DN620A AKL X1012 P 130 W5 40 W Cb 51 H United States DN585A ABA X1061 P 130 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Asia P acific DN621A UUF X1047 P 130 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Hong K ong DN608A AB5 X1041 P 130 W5 40 W Cb 25 H K orea DN602A AB1 X1031 P 130 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Asia P acific DN592A UUF X1005 P 130 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Belgium Denmark Fr a n c e Italy Latin America DL681A UUG DL681A ABY DL681A ABF DL681A ABZ DL858A ABM The Netherlands P or tugal Spain Sweden/Finland United Kingdom DL681A ABH DL681A AB9 DL681A ABE DL681A AK8 DL681A ABU Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 20 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â21 X1034 P 130 W5 40 D Cb 25 H T aiwan DN595A AB0 X1033 P 130 W5 40 D Cb 25 H Asia P acific DN594A UUF Thailand DN594A AKL X1027 P 130 W5 40 D Cb 25 H A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DN588A ABG X1040 P 130 W5 40 C Cb 25 H K orea DN601A AB1 X1026 P 130 W5 40 C Cb 25 H Asia P acific A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DN587A UUF DN587A ABG Thailand DN587A AKL Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 21 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1. 2 F e a t u r e s â Mobile Intel Pentium 4 Processo r -M 1.7-, 1.6-, 1.5-, 1.4-, or 1.3-GHz processors with 400-MHz processor side b us and 512-KB L2 cache, v arying b y notebook model â 15.4-inch wide UXGA (1920 Ã 1200), wide SXGA (1680 Ã 1050), or wide XGA (1280 Ã 800) TFT display with ov er 16.7 million colors, varying b y notebook model â A TI MOBILITY RADEON graphics with 32- or 64-MB DDR SDRAM â 80-, 60-, or 40-GB high-capacity hard dri ve, v arying by notebook model â 256-MB high-performance synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), expandable to 2.0 GB â W indo ws XP Home or W indo ws XP Pro, v arying by notebook model â Full-size W indo ws 98 ke yboard â T ouchPad pointing de vice with on/of f button and dedicated scroll up/do wn surface â 56-Kbps V .92 modem inte grated on the system board â Integrated Secure Digital (SD) flash media slot â Integrated 10/100 netw ork interface card (NIC) â Integrated wireless support for Mini PCI 802.11a/b/g and Bluetooth ï local area network (LAN) de vices â Support for one T ype II PC Card slot with support for both 32-bit (CardBus) and 16-bit PC Cards â External 65-watt A C adapter with po wer cord â 8-cell Li-Ion battery pack â Harman/Kardon speakers (HP P a vilion zt3000 models only) 325388-002.book Page 22 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â2 3 â JBL Pro speakers (HP Compaq nx7000 and Compaq Presario X1000 models only) â Support for the follo wing optical dri ves: â 24X Max D VD/CD-R W combo dri ve â 8X Max D VD-R W dri ve â 24X Max CD-R OM dri ve â Connectors for: â Microphone â Stereo speaker/headphone â Infrared â DC po wer â External monitor â S-V ideo â USB (3) â RJ-45 (network interf ace card, [NIC]) â RJ-11 (modem) â Parallel â 1394 digital â One T ype II PC Card slot â Docking 325388-002.book Page 23 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1. 3 C l e a r i n g a P a s s w o r d If the notebook you are servicing has an unkno wn password, follo w these steps to clear the password. These steps also clear CMOS: 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3, âPreparing the Notebook for Disassembly , â for more information). 2. Remov e the real time clock (R TC) battery (refer to Section 5.7, âR TC Batteryâ). 3. W ait approximately fi ve minutes. 4. Replace the R TC battery and reassemble the notebook. 5. Connect A C po wer to the notebook. Do not reinsert the battery pack at this time. 6. T urn on the notebook. All passwords and all CMOS settings ha ve been cleared. 325388-002.book Page 24 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â2 5 1. 4 P o w e r M a n a g e m e n t The notebook comes with po wer management features that extend battery operating time and conserv e power . The notebook supports the follo wing po wer management features: â Standby â Hibernation â Setting customization by the user â Hotke ys for setting le vel of performance â Battery calibration â Lid switch Standby/resume â Po wer/Standby b utton â Adv anced Conf iguration and Po wer Management (A CP) compliance 325388-002.book Page 25 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1 .5 Extern al Com ponents The external components on the front and left-side of the notebook are sho wn in the follo wing illustration and described in T able 1-5. F ro nt and L eft-Side C ompone nts 325388-002.book Page 26 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â2 7 Ta b l e 1 - 5 Fr ont and Left-Side Components Item Component Function 1 PC Card slot Suppor ts an optional T ype I or T ype II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card. 2 PC Card eject button Ejects an optional PC Card from the PC Card slot. 3 Optical drive Suppor ts an optical disc. 4 SD (Secure Digital) Memor y Card slot Suppor ts SD Cards and MultiMediaCards. 5 Microphone jac k Connects an op tional monaural or stereo microphone. 6 A udio line-out jac k Connects optional headphone or powe red stereo speake rs. Also connects the audio function of an audio/video de vice such as a tele vision or VCR. 7 Displa y release latch Opens the notebook. 8 Wireless de vice b utton T ur ns an optional internal wireless device on or off . 325388-002.book Page 27 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The notebook rear panel and right-side components are sho wn in the follo wing illustration and described in T able 1-6. R ear P a nel and R ight-Side C omponents Ta b l e 1 - 6 Rear P anel and Right-Side Components Item Component Function 1 Infrared por t Provides wireless comm unication between the notebook and an optional IrD A-compliant device . 2 P ow er connector Connect s an A C adapter cab le. 325388-002.book Page 28 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â29 3 Security cable slot Attaches an op tional security cable to the notebook. â The purpose of security solutions is to act as a deterrent. These solutions do not prevent the product from being mishandled or stolen. 4 V ents (2) Allow airflo w to cool inter nal components. Ã T o pre vent ov erheating, use the notebook only on hard surf aces which cannot obstruct the vents . Do not allow a soft surf ace, such as bedding, clothing, or a thick rug, to bloc k airflow . 5 Exter nal monitor connector Connects an optional V GA external monitor or projector . 6 S-Video connector Connects an optional S-Video de vice, such as a tele vision, VCR, camcorder , projector , or video capture card. 7 USB connectors (3) Connect optional 2.0-compliant USB de vices. 8 RJ-45 network jack Connects an Ethernet network cable. 9 RJ-11 telephone jack Connects a modem cable . 10 P arallel connector Connects an optional parallel de vice such as a printer . 11 1394 connector Connects an op tional 1394 de vice such as a camcorder or digital camera. Ta b l e 1 - 6 Rear P anel and Right-Side Components (Continued) Item Component Function 325388-002.book Page 29 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The notebook ke yboard components are shown in the follo wing illustration and described in T able 1-7. K e y boar d Com ponents 325388-002.book Page 30 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â31 Ta b l e 1 - 7 Ke yboard Components Item Component Function 1 F1 through F12 function keys P erf or m system and application tasks. When combined with the Fn key , th e function ke ys F1 and F3 through F12 perform additional tasks as hotk eys . 2 num lk ke y Enables n umeric lock and the internal ke ypad. 3 Inter nal k eypad Can be used li k e the ke ys on an external numeric ke ypad. 4 Cursor control ke ys Mov e th e cursor around the screen. 5 Applications key Displa ys a shor tcut menu f or items beneath the pointer . 6 Windows logo k ey Displa y the Windows Star t menu. 7 Fn k ey Ex ecutes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with another ke y . 325388-002.book Page 31 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The notebook top components are sho wn in the follo wing illustration and described in T able 1-8. T op C omponents Ta b l e 1 - 8 T op Components Item Component Function 1 Stereo speakers (2) Produce stereo sound. 2 P ow er button When the notebook is: â Off , press to tur n on the notebook. â On, briefly press to initiate Hiber nation. â In Standby , br iefly press to resume from Standby . â In Hiber nation, briefly press to restore from Hiber nation. 325388-002.book Page 32 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â33 3 Caps lock light On: Caps lock is on. 4 Num loc k light On: Num lock or the internal ke ypad is on. 5 Displa y lid switch â If the notebook is cl osed while on, tur ns off the displa y . â If the notebook is opened while in Standby , tur ns on the notebook (resumes from Standby). 6 V olume buttons (2) Increase or decrease system v olume. 7 Mute bu tton Mutes or restores v olume. 8 T ouchPad on/off bu tt o n Enables/disab les the T ouchP ad. 9 T ouchPad scroll zones (2) Scroll upward or do wnward. 10 Left and right T ouchP ad buttons Function like the left and right b uttons on an e xter nal mouse . 11 T ouchP ad Mov es the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. 12 T ouchP ad light On: T ouchP ad is enabled. Ta b l e 1 - 8 T op Components (Continued) Item Component Function 325388-002.book Page 33 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â3 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The external components on the bottom of the notebook are sho wn in the follo wing illustration and described in T able 1-9. Bot tom Component s Ta b l e 1 - 9 Bottom Components Item Component Function 1 F an vent Allows airflo w to cool inter nal components. Ã T o prev ent ov erheating, do not obstruct the vent. Using the notebook on a soft surf ace, such as a pillow , blank et, rug, or thick clothing, ma y bloc k airflow . 2 R TC batter y compar tment Contains the R TC batter y . 325388-002.book Page 34 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â35 3 Docking connector Connects the notebook to an optional por t replicator . 4 Mini PCI compar tment Contain s the Mini PCI wireless card. 5 Hard dr iv e bay Holds the inter nal hard drive . 6 Batter y bay Holds the batter y pack. 7 Batter y pack release latch Releases a batter y pack from the batter y ba y . 8 Memor y expansion compar tment Contains one memor y slot f or an optional 128-, 256-, 512-, or 1024-MB memor y module. Ta b l e 1 - 9 Bottom Components (Continued) Item Component Function 325388-002.book Page 35 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â3 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1. 6 D e s i g n O v e r v i e w This section presents a design ov erview of k ey parts and features of the notebook. Refer to Chapter 3, âIllustrated Parts Catalog, â to identify replacement parts, and Chapter 5, âRemo v al and Replacement Procedures, â for disassembly steps. The system board provides the follo wing device connections: â Memory expansion board â Hard dri ve â Display â K e yboard and T ouchPad â Audio â Mobile Intel Pentium 4 Processor -M processors â Fan â PC Card â Modem, NIC, and wireless de vices à CA UTION: T o pr operly v entilate the notebook , allow at leas t a 7 .6-cm (3-inc h) clear ance on the left and r ight si des of the not ebook . The notebook uses an electric fan for v e ntilation. The fan is controlled by a temperature sensor and is designed to turn on automatically when high temperature conditions exist. These conditions can be caused by high e xternal temperatures, heavy system po wer consumption, certain po wer management/battery conserv ation conf igurations, battery fast char ging, and some software applications. Exhaust air is displaced through the ventilation grill located on the left side of the notebook. 325388-002.book Page 36 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â1 2 T r oubl eshooting à W ARNI NG: Only author i z ed techni c ians tr ained by HP should r epair this equipment . All tr oubleshooting and r epair procedur es ar e detailed to allo w only su bass embl y/module lev el r epair . Because o f the comple x it y of the indi v idual boar ds and subasse mblies , do not at tempt to mak e repair s at the componen t lev el or modifi cations to an y pr inted w ir ing boar d. Im pr oper r epairs can c r eate a safety ha z ard . An y indicati on of component r eplacement or pr inted w iring boar d modif icati on may v oid an y war ranty or ex change allo wances . 2. 1 C omp uter Setu p and Di agnos tic s Utiliti es The notebook features two system management utilities: â Computer Setup âA system information and customization utility that can be used e ven when your operating system is not working or will not load. This utility includes settings that are not a v ailable in Microsoft ® Wi n d o w s ® . 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
2â2 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting â Diagnostics f or W indows âA system information and diagnostic utility that is used within the W indo ws operating system. Use this utility whene v er possible to: â Display system information. â T est system components. â T roubleshoot a de vice configuration problem in W indo ws XP Professional or W indo ws XP Home. â It is not necessary to conf ig ure a de vice connected to a USB connector on the notebook or to an optional port replicator . Using C ompu ter Setup Information and settings in Computer Setup are accessed from the File, Security , or Advanced menus: 1. T urn on or restart the notebook. Press F10 while the F10 = R OM-Based Setup message is displayed in the lo wer left corner of the screen. â T o change the language, press F2. â T o view na vigation information, press F1. â T o return to the Computer Setup menu, press esc. 2. Select the File, Security , or Adv anced menu. 3. T o close Computer Setup and restart the notebook: â Select File > Sa ve Changes and Exit and press enter . -or - â Select File > Ignore Changes and Exit and press enter . 4. When you are prompted to conf irm your action, press F10. 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â3 Selecti ng fr om the F ile Menu Ta b l e 2 - 1 File Menu Select T o Do This System Inf or mation â View identification inf or mation about the notebook, a por t replicator , and any batter y packs in the system. â View specification inf or mation about the processor , memor y and cache size , and system R OM. Sa ve to Flopp y Sa ve system config uration settings to a disk ette. Restore from Flopp y Restore system configuration settings from a diskette . Restore Def aults Replace configur ation settings in Computer Setup with f actor y def ault settings. Identification inf or mation is retained. Ignore Changes and Exit Cancel ch anges entered during the current session, then e xit and restar t the notebook. Sa ve Changes and Exit Sav e cha nges entered during the current session, then e xit and restar t the notebook. 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
2â4 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Selec ting from the Sec urity Menu Ta b l e 2 - 2 Security Menu Select T o Do This Administrator P ass word Enter , cha nge, or delete an administra tor pass word. P ow er-on P assw ord Enter , change, or delete a po wer-on pass word. DriveLoc k P ass words Enab le/disable DriveLoc k; change a Dr iv eLock User or Master pass word. â DriveLock Settings ar e accessible only when you enter Computer Setup by turning on (not restarting) the notebook. De vice Security Enab le/disable: â Po r t s â Disk ette write* â CD-ROM or disk ette star tup â Settings for a DVD-ROM can be entered in the CD-ROM field. System IDs Enter identificati on numbers f or the notebook, a por t replicator , and al l batter y pac ks in the system. 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â5 Selec ting from th e Ad v an ced Menu Ta b l e 2 - 3 Adv anced Menu Select T o Do This Language Change the Comp uter Setup language. Boot Options Enable/disable: â QuickBoot, which star ts the notebook more quic kly by eliminating some star tup tests. (If you suspect a memory fa ilure and want to test memor y automatically during star tup , disable Quic kBoot.) â MultiBoot, which sets a star tup sequence that can include most bootab le de vices and media in the system. De vice Options â Enable/disab le the embedded numeric ke ypad at star tup . â Enable/disab le multiple standard pointing de vices at star tup . (T o set the notebook to suppor t only a single, usually nonstandard, pointing de vice at star tup , select Disable .) â Enable/disab le USB legacy suppor t f or a USB ke yboard. (When USB legacy suppor t is enabled, the k eyboard works e v en when a Windows oper ating system is not loaded.) â Set an optional e xter nal monitor or ov erhead projector connected to a video card in a por t replicator as the primar y device . (When the notebook displa y is set as secondar y , the notebook must be shut do wn bef ore it is undock ed from a por t replicator .) 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
2â6 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting De vice Options (continued) â Change the parallel por t mode from Enhanced P arallel P or t (EPP , the def ault setting) to standard, bidirectional EPP , or Enhanced Capabilities P or t (ECP). â Set video-out mode to NTSC (def ault), P AL, NTSC-J , or P AL-M.* â Enable/disab le all settings in the SpeedStep ï window . (When Disable is selected, the notebook runs in Batter y Optimized mode .) â Specify how the notebook recogniz es multiple identical por t replicators that are identically equipped. Select Disable to recognize the por t replicators as a single por t replicator ; select Enable to recogniz e the por t replicators individually , by serial number . â Enable/disab le the repor ting of the processor serial number by the processor to the software . *Video modes v ar y e v en within regions. Ho we ver , NTSC is common in Nor th America; P AL, in Europe, Africa, and th e Middle East; NTSC-J, in J apan; and P AL-M, in Brazil. Other South and Ce ntral Amer ican regions can use NTSC , P AL, or P AL-M. Ta b l e 2 - 3 Adv anced Menu (Continued) Select T o Do This 325388-002.book Page 6 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â7 2.2 T r oub leshooting Flo wc h ar ts Ta b l e 2 - 4 T r oubleshooting Flowc harts Over view Flowc har t Description 2.1 Initial troubleshooting 2.2 No pow er , par t 1 2.3 No pow er , par t 2 2.4 No pow er , par t 3 2.5 No pow er , par t 4 2.6 No video , par t 1 2.7 No video , par t 2 2.8 Nonfunctioning por t replicator 2.9 No operating system (OS) loading 2.10 No OS loading from hard dr iv e, par t 1 2.11 No OS loading from hard dr iv e, par t 2 2.12 No OS loading from hard dr iv e, par t 3 2.13 No OS loading from CD- or D VD-RO M drive 2.14 No audio, part 1 2.15 No audio, part 2 2.16 Nonfunctioning device 2.17 Nonfunctioning keyboard 2.18 Nonfunctioning pointing device 2.19 No networ k or modem connection 325388-002.book Page 7 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
2â8 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc har t 2. 1âInitial T roubl eshooting Connecting to network or modem? Begin troubleshooting. Is there power? Is the OS loading? Is there video? (no boot) Is there sound? Beeps, LEDs, or error messages? Keyboard/ pointing device working? Go to Flowchart 2.17, Nonfunctioning Device. Go to Flowchart 2.2, No Power . Go to Flowchart 2.6, No Video. All drives working? Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N End N N N Go to Flowchart 2.9, No OS Loading. Go to Flowchart 2.15, No Audio. Go to Flowchart 2.18, Nonfunctioning Keyboard or Flowchart 2.19, Nonfunctioning Pointing Device. Check LED board, speaker connections. Go to Flowchart 2.20, No Network or Modem. 325388-002.book Page 8 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â9 Flo wc har t 2.2âNo P o wer , P art 1 1. Reseat the power cables in the port replicator and at the AC outlet. 2. Ensure that the AC power sour ce is active. 3. Ensure that the power strip is working. Done Remove from port replicator (if applicable). Power up on battery power? Power up on AC power? Power up in port replicator? Power up on battery power? Power up in port replicator? Done *Reset power . *Reset power . Power up on AC power? N Y Y N N Y N N Y Y YN 1. On some models, there is a separate reset button. 2. On some models, the notebook can be reset using the Standby switch and either the lid switch or the main power switch. *NOTES: Go to Flowchart 2.4, No Power , Part 3. Go to Flowchart 2.3, No Power , Part 2. Go to Flowchart 2.8, Nonfunctioning Port Replicator . No power (power LED is off). 325388-002.book Page 9 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
2â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc h art 2.3âNo P o w er , P ar t 2 Continued from Flowchart 2.2, No Power , Part 1. Visually check for debris in battery socket and clean if necessary . Done N Y Power on? Check battery by recharging it, moving it to another notebook, or replacing it. Power on? Done Y Replace power supply (if applicable). N Power on? Done Y N Go to Flowchart 2.4, No Power , Part 3. 325388-002.book Page 10 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â11 Flo wc har t 2.4âNo P o wer , P art 3 Continued from Flowchart 2.3, No Power , Part 2. Reseat AC adapter in notebook and at power sour ce. Internal or external AC adapter? Done Done Done Done Power on? Power on? Power on? Plug directly into AC outlet. Power LED on? Power outlet active? T r y different outlet. Replace external AC adapter . Replace power cord. Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N External Internal Go to Flowchart 2.5, No Power , Part 4. 325388-002.book Page 11 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
2â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc h art 2.5âNo P o w er , P ar t 4 Y N Continued from Flowchart 2.4, No Power , Part 3. Reseat loose components and boards, and replace damaged items. Open notebook. Loose or damaged parts? Y Close notebook and retest. Power on? Done N Replace the following items (if applicable) in the order given. Check notebook operation after each of the two following replacement steps: 1. Internal DC-DC converter , processor , and system board* 2. Internal AC adapter * NOTE: Replace these items as a set to prevent shorting out among components. 325388-002.book Page 12 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â13 Flo wc har t 2.6âNo Video, P art 1 A N Stand-alone or port replicator? No video. Replace the following one at a time. T est after each replacement. 1. Cable between notebook and notebook display (if applicable) 2. Inverter board (if applicable) 3. Display 4. VGA board Internal or external display*? Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Port Replicator Internal Stand-alone External Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Y Press lid switch to ensure operation. Video OK? Done Y N Video OK? Done Done N Check for bent pins on cable. Tr y another display . Internal and external video OK? Replace system board. YY N N * NOTE: T o change from internal to external display , use the hotkey combination. Y Go to Flowchart 2.7, No Video, Part 2. 5. System board 325388-002.book Page 13 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
2â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc har t 2.7âNo Video, P art 2 Y N Continued from Flowchart 2.6, No Video, Part 1. Done Adjust external monitor display . Video OK? Adjust display brightness. Video OK? Video OK? Done Done Check that notebook is properly seated in port replicator , for bent pins on cable, and for monitor connection. Go to âAâ in Flowchart 2.6, No Video, Part 1. Check brightness of external monitor . T r y another external monitor . Internal and external video OK? Go to Flowchart 2.8, Nonfunctioning Port Replicator . Y Y Y N N N Remove notebook from port replicator , if connected. 325388-002.book Page 14 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â15 Flo wc har t 2.8âNonfunc tioning P or t Replicator (i f applic able) Y N Reseat power cord in port replicator and power outlet. N Replace the following port replicator components one at a time. Check notebook operation after each replacement. 1. Power supply 2. I/O board 3. Backplane board 4. Switch box 5. Port replicator motor mechanism Check voltage setting on port replicator . Reset monitor cable connector at port replicator . Reinstall notebook into port replicator . Port replicator operating? Port replicator operating? Remove notebook, reseat all internal parts, and replace any damaged items in port replicator . Done Done Y Nonfunctioning port replicator . 325388-002.book Page 15 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
2â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc har t 2.9âNo O perating Sy stem (OS) Loa ding No OS loading from hard drive, go to Flowchart 2.10, No OS Loading, Hard Drive, Part 1. Reseat power cord in port replicator and power outlet. No OS loading.* * NOTE: Before beginning troubleshooting, always check cable connections, cable ends, and drives for bent or damaged pins. No OS loading from diskette drive, go to Flowchart 2.13, No OS Loading, Diskette Drive. No OS loading from CD- or DVD-ROM drive, go to Flowchart 2.14, No OS Loading, CD- or DVD-ROM Drive. No OS loading from network, go to Flowchart 2.20, No Network/Modem Connection. 325388-002.book Page 16 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â17 Flo wc har t 2. 1 0âNo OS Loadin g , Hard Driv e, P ar t 1 Go to Flowchart 2.17, Nonfunctioning Device. Done OS not loading from hard drive. Nonsystem disk message? Go to Flowchart 2.11, No OS Loading from Hard Drive, Part 2. Reseat external hard drive. OS loading? Done Boot from CD? Boot from hard drive? Y Y Y Y N N N N Check the Setup utility for correct booting order . 325388-002.book Page 17 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
2â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc har t 2. 1 1âNo OS Loadin g, H ard Driv e, P art 2 Continued from Flowchart 2.10, No OS Loading from Hard Drive, Part 1. Reseat hard drive. Done CD or diskette in drive? 1. Replace hard drive. 2. Replace system board. Go to Flowchart 2.13, No OS Loading from Diskette Drive. Load OS using System Restore CD (if applicable). Format hard drive and bring to a bootable C:\ prompt. Create partition, then format hard drive to bootable C:\ prompt. Boot from diskette drive? Remove diskette and reboot. Y N Boot from hard drive? Y N Y N Hard drive accessible? Y N Hard drive accessible? Done Run FDISK. Y N Hard drive partitioned? Hard drive formatted? Y N Y N Notebook booted? Done Y N Go to Flowchart 2.12, No OS Loading from Hard Drive, Part 3. Go to Flowchart 2.12, No OS Loading from Hard Drive, Part 3. 325388-002.book Page 18 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â19 Flo wc har t 2. 1 2âN o OS Loadin g, H ard Driv e, P ar t 3 Y System files on hard drive? Continued from Flowchart 2.11, No OS Loading from Hard Drive, Part 2. Clean virus. Done N Install OS and reboot. Virus on hard drive? OS loading from hard drive? Y N Y N Y N Diagnostics on diskette? Replace hard drive. Run diagnostics and follow recommendations. Run SCANDISK and check for bad sectors. Can bad sectors be fixed? Replace hard drive. Y N Y N Fix bad sectors. Boot from hard drive? Replace hard drive. Done 325388-002.book Page 19 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
2â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc har t 2. 1 3âNo OS Loa ding , CD- or D VD-ROM Driv e Y Done N Bootable disc in drive? Disc in drive? No OS loading from CD- or DVD-ROM Drive. Install bootable disc and reboot notebook. Go to Flowchart 2.17, Nonfunctioning Device. Go to Flowchart 2.17, Nonfunctioning Device. Install bootable disc. Boots from CD or DVD? Boots from CD or DVD? T r y another bootable disc. Booting from another device? Booting order correct? Correct boot order using the Setup utility . Done Reseat drive. Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Clear CMOS. Refer to Section 1.2, âClearing a Password,â for instructions. 325388-002.book Page 20 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â21 Flo wc har t 2. 1 4âNo Audio, P art 1 No audio. N Notebook in port replicator (if applicable)? Internal audio? Audio? Done Undock Audio? Done T urn up audio internally or externally . Go to Flowchart 2.16, No Audio, Part 2. Go to Flowchart 2.16, No Audio, Part 2. Go to Flowchart 2.17, Nonfunctioning Device. Replace the following port replicator components one at a time, as applicable. Check audio status after each change. 1. Replace port replicator audio cable. 2. Replace audio cable. 3. Replace speaker . 4. Replace port replicator audio board. 5. Replace backplane board. 6. Replace I/O board. Y Y Y Y N N N 325388-002.book Page 21 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
2â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc har t 2. 1 5âNo Audio, P ar t 2 YN Continued from Flowchart 2.15, No Audio, Part 1. Reload audio drivers. Audio driver in OS configured? Audio? Y Y Y N N N Correct drivers for application? Connect to external speaker . Load drivers and set configuration in OS. Audio? Done Replace audio board and speaker connections in notebook (if applicable). 1. Replace internal speakers. 2. Replace audio board (if applicable). 3. Replace system board. 325388-002.book Page 22 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â2 3 Flo wc har t 2. 1 6âNonfunc tionin g De vice Done Any physical device detected? Y N Unplug the nonfunctioning device from the notebook and inspect cables and plugs for bent or broken pins or other damage. Reseat device. Clear CMOS. Done Fix or replace broken item. Nonfunctioning device. Reattach device. Close notebook, plug in power , and reboot. Device boots properly? Go to Flowchart 2.9, No OS Loading. Device boots properly? Replace hard drive. Replace NIC. If integrated NIC, replace system board. Y N Y N 325388-002.book Page 23 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
2â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc har t 2. 1 7âNonfunc tionin g K e yboard Y N OK? Keyboard not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect notebook to good external keyboard. Reseat internal keyboard connector (if applicable). Replace internal keyboard or cable. OK? Y N Y N Done Done 325388-002.book Page 24 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â2 5 Flo wc har t 2. 1 8âNonfunc tionin g P ointing De vice Y N OK? Pointing device not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect notebook to good external pointing device. Reseat internal pointing device connector (if applicable). Replace internal pointing device or cable. OK? Y N Y N Done Done 325388-002.book Page 25 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
2â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc har t 2. 1 9âN o Net w ork/Modem C onnec tion Y Disconnect all power from the notebook and open. No network or modem connection. N Done Digital line? Network or modem jack active? Replace jack or have jack activated. Connect to nondigital line. NIC/modem configured in OS? Reload drivers and reconfigure. Reseat NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace system board. OK? OK? Done N N N N Y Y Y Y 325388-002.book Page 26 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â1 3 I llus trated P ar ts C a tal og This chapter provides an illustrated parts breakdo wn and a reference for spare part numbers and option part numbers. 3. 1 Seri al N umber Location When ordering parts or requesting information, provide the notebook serial number and model number located on the bottom of the notebook. Ser ial Number L ocation 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
3â2 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Cat alog 3.2 Notebook M ajor Com ponen ts Noteboo k Major Components 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â3 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Notebook Major Components Item Description Spare P art Number 1 Displa y assemblies With carbonite and platinum b lue finish f o r use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks 15.4-inch, WUXGA 15.4-inch, WSXGA 15.4-inch, WXGA 350084-001 350127-001 350126-001 With carbon finish f or use with HP Compaq nx7000 notebooks 15.4-inch, WUXGA 15.4-inch, WSXGA 15.4-inch, WXGA 337006-001 337003-001 337008-001 With silv er finish f or use with Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks 15.4-inch, WUXGA 15.4-inch, WSXGA 15.4-inch, WXGA 337005-001 337004-001 337007-001 1a Displa y in ver ter (includes f our displa y rubber scre w cov ers) 336994-001 Miscellaneous Plastics Kits Contains par ts with carbonite and platinum blue finish f or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks 350130-001 Contains par ts with carbon finish for use with HP Compaq nx7000 notebooks 338133-001 Contains par ts with silver finish f or use with Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks 337009-001 2a 2b 2c 2d 2e 2f Include: Switch cov er PC Card slot space sav er Docking connector co ver Hard drive shield Hard drive connector Hard drive cov er Notebook f eet (not illustrated) 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
3â4 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Cat alog Noteboo k Major Components 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â5 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Notebook Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 3 K eyboar ds Asia P acific A ustralia Belgium Denmark Fr a n c e Ger many Greece Hong K ong Inter national Italy Ko r e a Latin America 337016-371 337016-011 337016-181 337016-081 337016-051 337016-041 337016-151 337016-AC1 337016-B31 337016-061 337016-AD1 337016-161 The Netherlands Norwa y P eopleâ s Republic of China P or tugal Saudi Arabia Spain Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand United Kingdom United States 337016-331 337016-091 337016-AA1 337016-131 337016-171 337016-071 337016-111 337016-AB1 337016-281 337016-031 337016-001 4 Speaker co vers with cab le F or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks F or use with HP Compaq nx7000 and Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks 350122-001 336973-001 5 T op cover s (include T ouchP ad and T ouchPad shield) F or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks F or use with HP Compaq nx7000 and Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks 350123-001 336983-001 Bluetooth wireless communications boar d (not illustrated) 338134-001 Miscellaneous Cable Kit , includes 336973-001 6a 6b 6c Speaker co ver cab le SD Card slot board cab le Modem board cable 7 Optical drives 24X Max D VD-ROM/CD-R W combination drive 8X Max D V D-R OM drive 24X Max CD-ROM driv e 336987-001 336986-001 336985-001 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
3â6 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Cat alog Noteboo k Major Components 325388-002.book Page 6 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â7 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Notebook Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P ar t Number 8 V GA boar d shield (includes ther mal pads) 337013-001 9 V GA boar ds (include ther mal pads) F or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks A TI MOBILITY RADEON 9200 with 64-MB video memor y A TI MOBILITY RADEON 9200 with 32-MB video memor y 350129-001 350128-001 F or use with HP Compaq nx7000 and Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks A TI MOBILITY RADEON 9200 with 64-MB video memor y A TI MOBILITY RADEON 9200 with 32-MB video memor y A TI MOBILITY RADEON 7500c with 32-MB video memor y 336970-001 336969-001 336968-001 10 System boar d (includes ther mal pads) PC Card assemb ly (not illustr ated) 336964-001 337014-001 11 Pr ocessors (include ther mal pads) Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.7-GHz Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.6-GHz Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.5-GHz Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.4-GHz Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.3-GHz 345566-001 337011-001 337023-001 337024-001 337010-001 12 Base enc losure (includes infrared lens) Left and right wireless antennae with cables (not illustrated) Left and right speakers (not illustr ated) 336960-001 336959-001 337015-001 13 Heat sink with fan Thermal pad (not illustrated) 337000-001 337001-001 14 Fan 336993-001 15 SD Car d slot board with cab le 336963-001 325388-002.book Page 7 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
3â8 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Cat alog Noteboo k Major Components 325388-002.book Page 8 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â9 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Notebook Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P ar t Number Miscellaneous Doors/Co vers Kit , includes: 336984-001 16a 16b 16c 16d R TC batter y R TC batter y cov er Mini PCI compar tment cov er Memor y e xpansion compar tment cov er 17 Mini PCI comm unications boards Mini PCI 802.11b wireless LAN (RO W) Mini PCI 802.11b wireless LAN (MO W) Mini PCI 802.11 g wireless LAN 336976-001 336977-001 350083-001 18 Memory expansion boar ds 1024 MB DDR 512 MB DDR 256 MB DDR 128 MB DDR 339099-001 336998-001 336997-001 336996-001 19 Har d drives (hard dr iv e cov er , shield, and connector included with hard drive and in Miscellaneous Plastics Kits) 80-GB (5400-r pm) 80-GB (4200-r pm) 60-GB (5400-r pm) 60-GB (4200-r pm) 40-GB (4200-r pm) 30-GB (4200-r pm) 350082-001 336992-001 336991-001 336990-001 336989-001 350081-001 20 Modem boar d with cable 336999-001 21 Battery pack, 8-cell, 4.4-wH 336962-001 325388-002.book Page 9 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
3â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Cat alog 3. 3 M iscellan eous P l as tic s Ki t Comp one nts Miscel lane ous P l astics Kit Components 325388-002.book Page 10 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â11 T able 3-2 Miscellaneous Plastics Kit Components Spare P ar t Number 350130-001 (contains par ts with carbonite and platinum b lue finish for use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks) Spare P ar t Number 338133-001 (contains par ts with carbon finish f or use with HP Compaq nx7000 notebooks) Spare P ar t Number 337009-001 (contains par ts with silver finish f or use with Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks) Item Description 1S w i t c h c o v e r 2 PC Card slot space sa ver 3 Docking connector co ver 4 Notebook f eet (7) 5 Hard drive co ver 6 Hard drive shield 7 Hard drive connector 325388-002.book Page 11 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
3â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Cat alog 3.4 M iscellan eous C ab le Kit Comp one nts Misce llaneous C able K it Components Ta b l e 3 - 3 Miscellaneous Cable Kit Components Spare P ar t Number 336973-001 Item Description 1 SD Card slot board cable 2 Speaker co v er cable 3 Modem cable 325388-002.book Page 12 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â13 3.5 M iscell aneous Doors/Co v ers Kit Comp one nts Misc el la ne ous D oo rs/ Cov ers Kit Comp on ent s Ta b l e 3 - 4 Miscellaneous Doors/Co vers Kit Components Spare P ar t Number 336984-001 Item Description 1 R TC batter y 2 R TC batter y cov er 3 Memor y e xpansion compar tment cov er 4 Mini PCI compar tment cov er 325388-002.book Page 13 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
3â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Cat alog 3.6 M a s s St o ra g e D e vi ce s Mass S tor age Dev ice s T able 3-5 Mass Storage De vices Spare P ar t Number Information Item Description Spare P ar t Number 1 Optical drives 24X Max D VD-ROM/CD-R W combination drive 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 24X Max CD-ROM driv e D VD RW drive 336987-001 336986-001 336985-001 345588-001 2 Har d drives (include hard drive bez el and frame) 80-GB (5400-r pm) 80-GB (4200-r pm) 60-GB (5400-r pm) 60-GB (4200-r pm) 40-GB (4200-r pm) 30-GB (4200-r pm) 350082-001 336992-001 336991-001 336990-001 336989-001 350081-001 USB diskette drive (not illustrated) 336988-001 325388-002.book Page 14 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â15 3.7 M iscellan eous Ta b l e 3 - 6 Miscellaneous (not illustrated) Spare P ar t Information Description Spare P art Number AC a d a p t e r 338136-001 Logo Kits F or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks F or use with HP Compaq nx7000 notebooks F or use with Compaq Pr esario X1000 notebooks 350125-001 336995-001 338135-001 Po w e r c o r d s F or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks Asia P acific A ustralia Belgium Denmark Europe Fr a n c e Ger many Greece Hong K ong Italy Ko r e a Latin America The Netherlands 350055-371 350055-011 350055-181 350055-081 350055-021 350055-051 350055-041 350055-151 350055-AC1 350055-061 350055-AD1 350055-161 350055-331 Norwa y Pe o p l e âs Republic of China P or tugal Saudi Arabia Spain Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand United Kingdom United States 350055-091 350055-AA1 350055-131 350055-171 350055-071 350055-111 350055-AB1 350055-281 350055-031 350055-001 325388-002.book Page 15 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
3â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Cat alog Po w e r c o r d s F or use with HP Compaq nx7000 an d Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks A ustralia Denmark Europe/Middle East/Africa Italy 246959-011 246959-081 246959-021 246959-061 Jap a n Ko r e a Switzerland United Kingdom United States 246959-291 246959-AD1 246959-A G1 246959-031 246959-001 Screw Kit (includes the f ollowing scre ws; ref er to Appendix C , âScrew Listing, â for more inf or mation on screw specifications and usage . ) 337012-001 â Phillips M2.5Ã15.0 scre w â Phillips M2.5Ã7.0 screw â Phillips M2.5Ã5.0 screw â Spring-loaded Phillips M2.0Ã9.0 screw â Phillips M2.5Ã3.5 scre w â Phillips M2.5Ã3.0 scre w â Phillips M2.0Ã3.0 scre w Ta b l e 3 - 6 Miscellaneous (not illustrated) Spare P ar t Information (Continued) Description Spare P art Number 325388-002.book Page 16 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â1 4 Remo v a l and Repl a cemen t Preliminaries This chapter provides essential information for proper and safe remov al and replacement service. 4. 1 T ools Required Y ou will need the follo wing tools to complete the remov al and replacement procedures: â Magnetic scre wdriv er â Phillips P0 scre wdri v er â 5.0-mm socket for system board standof fs â Flat-bladed scre wdriv er â T ool kit (includes connector remov al tool, loopback plugs, and case utility tool) 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
4â2 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s 4.2 S er vice C onsidera tions The follo wing sections include some of the considerations that you should keep in mind during disassembly and assembly procedures. â As you remov e each subassem bly from the notebook, place the subassembly (and all accompanying scre ws) aw ay from the work area to pre vent damage. Pl a s t i c Pa r t s Using excessi ve force during disassembly and reassembly can damage plastic parts. Use care when handling the plastic parts. Apply pressure only at the points designated in the maintenance instructions. Ca bl es and C onnec tors à CA UTION: When ser vicing the notebook , ensure that cables are placed in their proper locations during the reassembly process . Improper cable placement can damage the notebook. Cables must be handled with extreme care to a void damage. Apply only the tension required to unseat or seat the cables during remov al and insertion. Handle cables by the connector whene ver possible. In all cases, a void bending, twisting, or tearing cables. Ensure that cables are routed in such a way that they cannot be caught or snagged b y parts being remove d or replaced. Handle flex cables w ith e xtreme care; these cables tear easily . 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminari es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â3 4. 3 Pr e v e nti ng Damage to R emo v able D ri v es Remov able dri ves are fragile components that must be handled with care. T o prev ent damage to the notebook, damage to a remov able dri ve, or loss of information, observ e the follo wing precautions: â Before removing or inserting a hard dri ve, shut do wn the notebook. If you are unsure whether the notebook is of f or in Hibernation, turn the notebook on, then shut it do wn. â Before removing a disk ette dri v e or optical dri ve, ensure that a diskette or disc is not in the dri ve. Ensure that the optical dri v e tray is closed. â Before handling a dri ve, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity . While handling a dri ve, a void touching the connector . â Handle dri v es on surfaces that ha ve at least one inch of shock-proof foam. â A v oid dropping dri ves from an y height onto any surface. â After removing a hard dri ve, CD-R OM dri ve, or a diskette dri v e, place it in a static-proof bag. â A v oid exposing a hard dri ve to products that ha ve magnetic f ields, such as monitors or speakers. â A v oid exposing a dri ve to temperature e xtremes or liquids. â If a dri ve must be mailed, place the dri ve in a b ubble pack mailer or other suitable form of protecti v e packaging and label the package, âFragile: Handle W ith Care. â 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
4â4 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s 4.4 Pre v enting El ec trostati c Dam ag e Many electronic components are sensiti ve to electrostatic dischar ge (ESD). Circuitry design and structure determine the degree of sensiti vity . Networks b uilt into man y integrated circuits provide some protection, b ut in many cases, the dischar ge contains enough po wer to alter de vi ce parameters or melt silicon junctions. A sudden dischar ge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor can destroy static-sensiti ve de vices or microcircuitry . Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, b ut damage occurs. An electronic de vice exposed to electrostatic discharge might not be af fected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. Or the de vice might function normally for a while, then degrade in the internal layers, reducing its life e xpectancy . 4.5 P ac k agin g and T ranspor ting Precautions Use the follo wing grounding precautions when packaging and transporting equipment: â T o av oid hand contact, transport products in static-safe containers, such as tubes, bags, or boxes. â Protect all electrostatic-sensiti ve parts and assemblies with conducti ve or appro ved containers or packaging. â K eep electrostatic-sensiti ve parts in their containers until the parts arri v e at static-free workstations. â Place items on a grounded surface before remo ving items from their containers. â Alw ays be properly grounded when touching a sensiti ve component or assembly . 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminari es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â5 â Store reusable electrostatic-sensiti v e parts from assemblies in protecti v e packaging or nonconducti ve foam. â Use transporters and con ve yors made of antistatic belts and roller b ushings. Ensure that mechanized equipment used for moving materials is wired to ground and that proper materials are selected to a v oid static charging. When grounding is not possible, use an ionizer to dissipate electric char ges. 4.6 W or ksta tion Precau tions Use the follo wing grounding precautions at workstations: â Cov er the workstation with approv ed static-shielding material (refer to T able 4-2). â Use a wrist strap connected to a properly grounded work surface and use properly grounded tools and equipment. â Use conducti ve f ield service tools, such as cutters, scre wdriv ers, and v acuums. â When using f ixtures that must directly contact dissipati ve surfaces, only use f ixtures made of static-safe materials. â K eep the work area free of nonconducti ve materials, such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam. â Handle electrostatic-sensiti v e components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCM laminate. Handle these items only at static-free workstations. â A v oid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry . â T urn of f power and input signals before inserting or remo ving connectors or test equipment. 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
4â6 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s 4.7 G roundin g Eq uipm ent an d Methods Grounding equipment must include either a wrist strap or a foot strap at a grounded workstation. â When seated, wear a wrist strap connected to a grounded system. Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of one megohm ±10% resistance in the ground cords. T o provide proper ground, wear a strap snugly against the skin at all times. On grounded mats with banana-plug connectors, use alligator clips to connect a wrist strap. â When standing, use foot stra ps and a grounded floor mat. Foot straps (heel, toe, or boot straps) can be used at standing workstations and are compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conducti ve floors or dissipati ve floor mats, use foot straps on both feet with a minimum of one megohm resistance between the operator and ground. T o be effecti ve, the conducti ve strips must be w orn in contact with the skin. Other grounding equipment recommended for use in pre v enting electrostatic damage includes: â Antistatic tape â Antistatic smocks, aprons, and slee ve protectors â Conducti v e bins and other assembly or soldering aids â Nonconducti v e foam â Conducti v e tabletop workstations with ground cords of one megohm resistance â Static-dissipati ve tables or floor mats with hard ties to the ground â Field service kits â Static aw areness labels â Material-handling packages â Nonconducti v e plastic bags, tubes, or boxes 325388-002.book Page 6 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminari es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â7 â Metal tote boxes â Electrostatic v oltage le vels and protecti ve materials T able 4-1 shows ho w humidity affects the electrostatic v oltage le vels generated by dif ferent activities. T able 4-2 lists the shielding protection provided by antistatic bags and floor mats. Ta b l e 4 - 1 T ypical Electrostatic V oltage Levels Relative Humidity Event 10% 40% 55% W alking across car pet 35,000 V 15,000 V 7,500 V W alking across vinyl floor 12,000 V 5,000 V 3,000 V Motions of bench worker 6,000 V 800 V 400 V Removing DIPS from plastic tube 2,000 V 700 V 400 V Removing DIPS from vin yl tra y 11,500 V 4,000 V 2,000 V Removing DIPS from Styrof oam 14,500 V 5,000 V 3,500 V Removing b ubble pac k from PCB 26,500 V 20,000 V 7,000 V P acking PCBs in f oam-lined box 21,000 V 11,000 V 5,000 V â A product can be degraded by as little as 700 V. Ta b l e 4 - 2 Static-Shielding Materials Material Use V oltage Protection Le vel Antistatic plastic Bags 1,500 V Carbon-loaded plastic Floor mats 7,500 V Metallized laminate Floor mats 5,000 V 325388-002.book Page 7 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â1 5 Remo v a l and Repl a cemen t Pr ocedure s This chapter provides remo val and replacement procedures. There are 50 Phillips scre ws, in nine dif ferent sizes, that must be remov ed, replaced, and/or loosened when servicing the notebook. Make special note of each scre w size and location during remov al and replacement. Refer to Appendix C, âScre w Li sting, â for detailed information on scre w sizes, locations, and usage. 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
5â2 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 1 S e r i a l N u m b e r Report the notebook serial number to HP when requesting information or ordering spare parts. The serial number is located on the bottom of the notebook. Ser ial Number L ocation 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â3 5 .2 Di sassembl y Seque nce Chart Use the follo wing chart to determine the section number to be referenced when removing notebook components. Disassembl y Sequence Chart Section Description # of Screws Remo ved 5.3 Preparing the notebook for disassemb l y Batter y pack 0 Hard drive 2 Hard drive co ver and shield 4 5.4 Notebook f eet 0 5.5 Memor y e xpansion board 1 5.6 Mini PCI communications board 1 5.7 R TC batter y 0 5.8 Optical drive 1 5.9 K eyboard 2 5.10 Switch cov er 0 5.11 Speake r cov er 4 5.12 F an 1 5.13 Heat sink 4 5.14 Processor 0 5.15 Displa y assembly 7 5.16 T op cov er 16 5.17 Bluetooth board 2 5.18 SD Card slot board and cable 2 5.19 V GA board and shield 2 5.20 Modem board and cable 0 5.21 System board 1 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
5â4 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 .3 Preparing t h e Notebook for Di sassem bl y Before you begin an y remov al or installation procedures: 1. Sa ve your w ork, exit all applications, and shut do wn the notebook. If you are not sure whet her the notebook is of f or in Hibernation, briefly press the po wer b utton. If your work returns to the screen, sa ve your w ork, exit all applications, and then shut do wn the notebook. 2. Disconnect all external de vices connected to the notebook. 3. Disconnect the po wer cord. 4. Remov e the battery pack by follo wing these steps: a. T urn the notebook upside do wn, with the rear panel facing you. Spare P ar t Number Information Batter y pack, 8-cell, 4.4-wH 336962-001 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 b . Slide and hold 1 the battery release latch to the right. The front edge of the battery pack releases from the notebook. c. Lift the front edge of the battery pack up and swing it back 2 . R emo ving the Battery P ack d. Remov e the battery pack. Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the battery pack. 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
5â6 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. Remov e the hard driv e by follo wing these steps: a. T urn the notebook upside do wn, with the front facing you. b . Remove the tw o PM2.5Ã9.5 scre ws 1 that secure the hard dri ve to the notebook. c. Use the notch 2 on the hard dri ve co ver to lift the rear edge of the hard dri v e up and swing it forward 3 . R emo ving the Har d Dri ve d. Remov e the hard driv e. Spare P ar t Number Information Hard drives (hard driv e cov er , sh ield, and connecto r included with hard drive and in Misc ellaneous Plastics Kits) 80-GB (5400-r pm) 80-GB (4200-r pm) 60-GB (5400-r pm) 60-GB (4200-r pm) 40-GB (4200-r pm) 30-GB (4200-r pm) 350082-001 336992-001 336991-001 336990-001 336989-001 350081-001 325388-002.book Page 6 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â7 Ã CA UTION: The har d dri ve co ver should be r emov ed only if it is damaged and mus t be r eplaced . Unneces sar ily r emov ing the cov er can r esult in damage to the co ver and har d dr i ve and lo ss o f infor mation . e. Remov e the four PM2.5Ã3.5 screws 1 that secure the hard dri ve to the hard dri ve co ver and shield. f. Remove the hard dri ve shield 2 and connector 3 from the hard dri ve. g. Separate the hard dri v e from the hard dri ve co ve r 4 . R emo ving the Har d Dri ve f r om the H ar d Dri ve C o v er â The hard dri ve co ver , shield, and connector are included with the hard dri ve and also in the Miscellaneous Plastics Kits, spare part number 350130-001 for HP Pa vilion zt3000 models, spare part number 338133-001 for HP Compaq nx7000 models, and spare part number 337009-001 for Compaq Presario X1000 models. Re verse the abo ve procedure to install the hard dri ve. 325388-002.book Page 7 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
5â8 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 .4 Notebook F eet The notebook feet are adhesi ve-backed rubber pads, and are included in the Miscellaneous Plastics Kits, spare part number 350130-001 for HP Pa vilion zt3000 models, spare part number 338133-001 for HP Compaq nx7000 models, and spare part number 337009-001 for Compaq Presario X1000 models. The notebook feet attach to the base enclosure as indicated in the follo wing illustration. R eplac ing the Notebook F eet 325388-002.book Page 8 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â9 5 .5 Memor y Expansion B oard 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. T urn the notebook upside do wn, with the front facing you. 3. Loosen the PM2.5Ã5.0 scre w 1 that secures the memory expansion compartment co ver to the notebook. 4. Lift the front edge of the cov er up 2 and swing it back. R emo v ing the Memor y Expansion C ompartment Co ver 5. Remov e the cov er . â The memory expansion compartment co ver is included in the Miscellaneous Doors/Cov ers Kit, spare part number 336984-001. Spare P ar t Number Information 1024-MB DDR memor y e xpansion board 512-MB DDR memor y e xpansion board 256-MB DDR memor y e xpansion board 128-MB DDR memor y e xpansion board 336909-001 336998-001 336997-001 336996-001 325388-002.book Page 9 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
5â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. Spread the retaining tabs 1 that secure the memory expansion board to the sock et. The board rises up at a 45-degree angle. 7. Pull the board aw ay from the socket at a 45-de gree angle 2 . R emo v ing the Memor y Expansion Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a memory e xpansion board. 325388-002.book Page 10 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â11 5 .6 Mini PCI Communica tions Board 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. T urn the notebook upside do wn, with the front facing you. 3. Loosen the PM2.5Ã5.0 scre w 1 that secures the Mini PCI compartment cov er to the notebook. 4. Lift the rear edge of the cov er up 2 and swing it forward. R emo ving the Mini P CI Compartment C ov er 5. Remov e the cov er . â The Mini PCI compartment cov er is included in the Miscellaneous Doors/Cov ers Kit, spare part number 336984-001. Spare P ar t Number Information Mini PCI 802.11b wireless LAN (R O W) Mini PCI 802.11b wireless LAN (MO W) Mini PCI 802.11g wireless LAN 336976-001 336977-001 350083-001 325388-002.book Page 11 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. Disconnect the two antenna cables from the terminals on the Mini PCI communications board 1 . Note that the longer of the two cables should be connected to the left antenna terminal (marked â A UXâ) and the shorter cable should be connected to the right terminal (marked âMAINâ). 7. Spread the retaining tabs 2 that secure the memory expansion board to the sock et. The board rises up at a 45-degree angle. 8. Pull the board aw ay from the socket at a 45-de gree angle 3 . R emo ving the Mi ni PCI C ommunicati ons Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a Mini PCI communications board. 325388-002.book Page 12 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â13 5. 7 R TC B a t t e r y â The R TC battery and R TC battery co ver are included in the Miscellaneous Doors/Cov ers Kit, spare part number 336984-001. 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. T urn the notebook upside do wn, with the front facing you. 3. Insert a flat-bladed tool into the notch 1 on the front edge of the R TC battery cov er and separate the front edge of the cov er from the notebook. 4. Remov e the R TC battery from the socket on the system board 2 . R emo ving the R T C batter y Re v erse the abov e procedure to install an R TC battery . 325388-002.book Page 13 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 .8 Optical Driv e 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. T urn the notebook upside do wn, with the front facing you. 3. Remov e the PM2.5Ã9.5 screw 1 that secures the optical dri v e to the notebook. 4. Insert a slender tool into the slot in the hard dri ve bay and push to the right to disengage the optical dri ve from the notebook 2 . R emo ving the Opti cal Dr i ve 5. Remov e the optical driv e. Re v erse the abov e procedure to install an optical dri ve. Spare P ar t Number Information 24X Max D VD-ROM/CD-R W combination dr ive 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 24X Max CD-ROM driv e 336987-001 336986-001 336985-001 325388-002.book Page 14 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â15 5. 9 Ke y b o a r d 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. T urn the notebook upside do wn, with the front facing you. 3. Remov e the two PM2.5Ã15.0 scre ws that secure the ke yboard to the base enclosure. R emo ving the K e yboar d Scr e w s Spare P ar t Number Information Asia P acific A ustralia Belgium Denmark Fr a n c e Ger many Greece Hong K ong Inter national Italy Ko r e a Latin America 337016-371 337016-011 337016-181 337016-081 337016-051 337016-041 337016-151 337016-AC1 337016-B31 337016-061 337016-AD1 337016-161 The Netherlands Norwa y P eopleâ s Republic of China P or tugal Saudi Arabia Spain Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand United Kingdom United States 337016-331 337016-091 337016-AA1 337016-131 337016-171 337016-071 337016-111 337016-AB1 337016-281 337016-031 337016-001 325388-002.book Page 15 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 4. T urn the notebook right-side up with the front facing you. 5. Open the notebook. 6. Slide the four notches on the top edge of the ke yboard to ward you. R eleasing the K e yboar d 325388-002.book Page 16 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â17 7. Lift the rear edge of the ke yboard, swing it up and forward 1 , and rest it on the top cov er . 8. Release the ZIF connector 2 to which the ke yboard cable is attached and disconnect the ke yboard cable 3 from the system board. Disconnec ting the K e yboar d Cable 9. Remov e the keyboard. Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the ke yboard. After the ke yboard is remo ved, the internal memory e xpansion board connector is accessible. Refer to the âMemory Expansion Boardâ section for instructions on removing the internal memory expansion board. 325388-002.book Page 17 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 1 0 Sw i t c h C ove r â The switch cov er is included in the Miscellaneous Plastics Kits, spare part number 350130-001 for HP Pa vilion zt3000 models, spare part number 338133-001 for HP Compaq nx7000 models, and spare part number 337009-001 for Compaq Presario X1000 models. 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. Remov e the keyboard (Section 5.9). 3. Insert a flat-bladed tool under the outside edges of the hinge cov er areas and lift up to disengage the left and right sides of the cov er from the notebook. 4. Remov e the switch cove r . R emo ving the S w itch C o v er Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the switch cov er . 325388-002.book Page 18 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â19 5. 1 1 S p e a ke r C ove r 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. Remov e the keyboard (Section 5.9). 3. Remov e the switch cov er (Section 5.10). 4. Disconnect the audio cable 1 from the system board. 5. Remov e the three PM2.5Ã5.0 screws 2 and the PM2.5Ã3.0 scre w 3 that secure the speaker cov er to the notebook. R emo ving the S peak er Co ver S cr e w s Spare P ar t Number Information Speaker co v er with cable F or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks F or use with HP Compaq nx7000 and Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks The speake r cov er cable is also included in the Miscellaneous Cab le Kit, spare par t number 336973-001. 350122-001 336973-001 325388-002.book Page 19 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. Lift the left side of the speaker co ver shield and swing it up and slightly to the right 1 . 7. Slide the speaker co ver back 2 to disengage it from the notebook. 8. Remov e the speaker cov er . R emo ving the S peak er Co ver Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the speaker co ver . 325388-002.book Page 20 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â21 5. 1 2 F a n 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. Remov e the keyboard (Section 5.9). 3. Remov e the switch cov er (Section 5.10). 4. Remov e the speaker cov er (Section 5.11). 5. Disconnect the fan cable 1 from the system board. 6. Remov e the PM2.5Ã5.0 screw 2 that secures the f an to the base enclosure. 7. Remov e the fan 3 . R emo ving the F an Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the fan. Spare P ar t Number Information F an 336993-001 The f an is also included with the heat sink, spare par t number 337000-001. 325388-002.book Page 21 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 1 3 H e a t S i n k 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3) and remov e the following components: â K eyboard (Section 5.9) â Switch cov er (Section 5.10) â Speaker co v er (Section 5.11) â Fan (Section 5.12) 2. Remov e the four PM2.0Ã9.0 spring-loaded shoulder scre ws 1 that secure the heat sink to the notebook. 3. Lift the front edge of the heat sink 2 and slide the heat sink out of the notebook at an angle 3 . R emo ving the Heat Sink Spare P ar t Number Information Heat sink with f an Ther mal pad 337000-001 337001-001 325388-002.book Page 22 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 3 â Carefully clean any thermal grease residue from the heat sink 1 and processor surfaces 2 each time you remo ve the heat sink. Apply ne w thermal grease to both surfaces. R emo v ing the Ther mal Gr ease F r om the Heat Sink and Proce sso r Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the heat sink. 325388-002.book Page 23 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 1 4 P r o c e s s o r 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3) and remov e the following components: â K eyboard (Section 5.9) â Switch cov er (Section 5.10) â Speaker co v er (Section 5.11) â Fan (Section 5.12) â Heat sink (Section 5.13) Spare P ar t Number Information Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.7-GHz Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.6-GHz Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.5-GHz Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.4-GHz Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.3-GHz 345566-001 337011-001 337023-001 337024-001 337010-001 325388-002.book Page 24 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 5 2. Use a flat-bladed tool to turn the processor locking scre w 1 one-quarter turn counterclockwise. 3. Lift the processor straight up 2 and remo ve it. â Note that the gold triangle 3 should be in the lo wer right corner when installing the processor . R emo ving the Pr ocess or Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the processor . 325388-002.book Page 25 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 5 Di spla y Asse mbl y 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. Remov e the keyboard (Section 5.9). 3. Remov e the switch cov er (Section 5.10). Spare P ar t Number Information With carbonite and platinum b lue finish f or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks 15.4-inch, WUXGA 15.4-inch, WSXGA 15.4-inch, WXGA 350084-001 350127-001 350126-001 With carbon finish f or use wi th HP Compaq nx7000 notebooks 15.4-inch, WUXGA 15.4-inch, WSXGA 15.4-inch, WXGA 337006-001 337003-001 337008-001 With silv er finish f or use with Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks 15.4-inch, WUXGA 15.4-inch, WSXGA 15.4-inch, WXGA 337005-001 337004-001 337007-001 Displa y inv er ter (includes four displa y r ubber scre w cov ers) 336994-001 325388-002.book Page 26 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 7 4. Remov e the PM2.5Ã15.0 screw 1 that secures the display cable to the base enclosure. 5. Disconnect the display video cable 2 from the system board. Disconnec ting the Displa y Cable 325388-002.book Page 27 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. Close the notebook and turn the notebook upside do wn, with the rear panel facing you. 7. Remov e the following scre ws: â T wo PM2.5Ã9.5 scre ws 1 that secure the display assembly to the base enclosure through the bottom of hte top cov er â Three PM2.5Ã7.0 scre ws 2 that secure the display assembly to the base enclosure through the rear panel â One PM2.5Ã5.0 scre w 3 that secures the display assembly to the base enclosure through the rear panel R emo ving the Dis play S cr ew s 325388-002.book Page 28 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â29 8. T urn the notebook right-side up with the front facing you. 9. Open the display to the fully upright position. 10. Lift the display assembly straight up and remov e it. R emo ving the Dis play As sembl y Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the display assembly . 325388-002.book Page 29 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 1 6 T o p C ove r â When replacing the top cov er , de termine if a Bluetooth board is installed in the defecti ve top co ver . If a board is installed, remo ve it from the defecti ve top co ver and install it in the replacement top cov er . Refer to Section 5.17, âBluetooth Board, â for instructions on removing and installing a Bluetooth board. 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. Disconnect the wireless antenna cables from the Mini PCI communications board (Section 5.6). 3. Remov e the following components: â Optical dri ve (Section 5.8) â K eyboard (Section 5.9) â Switch cov er (Section 5.10) â Speaker co v er (Section 5.11) â Display assembly (Section 5.15) 4. T urn the notebook upside do wn, with the front facing you. Spare P ar t Number Information T op cov er (includes T ouchPad and T ouchP ad shield) F or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks F or use with HP Compaq nx7000 and Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks 350123-001 336983-001 325388-002.book Page 30 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â31 5. Remov e the following scre ws: â Three PM2.5Ã9.5 scre ws 1 along the front edge of the notebook â T wo PM2.5Ã5.0 scre ws 2 in the hard dri ve bay â Six PM2.5Ã15.0 scre ws 3 â One PM2.5Ã9.5 scre w 4 behind the hard dri ve bay R emo ving the T op Co ver S cr e w s 325388-002.book Page 31 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. T urn the notebook right-side up with the rear panel facing you. 7. Release the ZIF connector 1 to which the T ouchPad cable is attached and disconnect the T ouchPad cable 2 from the system board. 8. Route the two antenna cables 3 out of the hole in the system board. Disconnec ting the T ouc hP ad Cable and R outing the Wi r eles s Anten na Cab les 325388-002.book Page 32 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â33 9. If connected, disconnect the Bluetooth board cable 1 from the system board. 10. Disconnect the left 2 and right speaker cables 3 from the system board. Disconnec ting the Bluetooth W irele ss Module and Spe aker Cabl es 325388-002.book Page 33 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â3 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 11. Position the notebook so the front faces forw ard. 12. Remov e the following scre ws: â T wo PM2.5Ã7.0 scre ws 1 that secure the top cov er to the base enclosure â One PM2.0Ã3.0 scre w 2 that secures the top cov er and modem to the base enclosure â One PM2.5Ã5.0 scre w 3 that secures the top cov er to the base enclosure abov e the USB connector R emo ving the T op Co ver S cr e w s 325388-002.book Page 34 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â35 13. Lift the back edge of the top cov er 1 and swing it forward to disengage it from the base enclosure. 14. Remov e the top cover 2 . R emo ving the T op Co ver Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the top cov er . 325388-002.book Page 35 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â3 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 7 Bluetoot h Board 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3) and remov e the following components: â Mini PCI communications board (Section 5.6) â Optical dri ve (Section 5.8) â K eyboard (Section 5.9) â Switch cov er (Section 5.10) â Speaker co v er (Section 5.11) â Display assembly (Section 5.15) â T op cov er (Section 5.16) 2. T urn the top cov er right-side up with the T ouchPad facing you. Spare P ar t Number Information Bluetooth wireless communi cations board 338134-01 325388-002.book Page 36 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5 â3 7 3. Disconnect the Bluetooth board cable 1 from the Bluetooth board. â The Bluetooth board cable is included in the Miscellaneous Cable Kit, spare part number 336973-001. 4. Remov e the two PM1.5Ã3.0 scre ws 2 that secure the Bluetooth board to the top cov er . 5. Slide the Bluetooth board forward 3 , then lift it up 4 and remov e it from the top cov er . R emo ving the Bluet ooth Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the Bluetooth board. 325388-002.book Page 37 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â3 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 8 SD C ard Slot Board and Ca bl e 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3) and remov e the following components: â Mini PCI communications board (Section 5.6) â Optical dri ve (Section 5.8) â K eyboard (Section 5.9) â Switch cov er (Section 5.10) â Speaker co v er (Section 5.11) â Display assembly (Section 5.15) â T op cov er (Section 5.16) Spare P ar t Number Information SD Card slot board with cab le 336963-001 The SD Card slot board cable is also included in the Miscellaneous Cab le Kit, spare par t number 336973-001. 325388-002.book Page 38 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â3 9 2. Disconnect the SD Card slot board cable 1 from the system board. 3. Remov e the PM2.5Ã5.0 screw 2 that secures the SD Card slot board to the notebook. 4. Remov e the PM2.5Ã5.0 screw 3 that secures the SD Card slot board cable ground loop to the notebook. 5. Remov e the SD Card slot board and cable. R emo ving the SD C ar d Slot Boar d and Cable Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the SD Card slot board and cable. 325388-002.book Page 39 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â40 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 9 V G A B oard and Shield 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3) and remov e the following components: â Mini PCI communications board (Section 5.6) â Optical dri ve (Section 5.8) â K eyboard (Section 5.9) â Switch cov er (Section 5.10) â Speaker co v er (Section 5.11) â Display assembly (Section 5.12) â T op cov er (Section 5.16) Spare P ar t Number Information V GA boards (include ther mal pads) F or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks A TI MOBILITY RADEON 9200 with 64-MB video memor y A TI MOBILITY RADEON 9200 with 32-MB video memor y 350129-001 350128-001 F or use with HP Compaq nx7000 and Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks A TI MOBILITY RADEON 9200 with 64 -MB video memor y A TI MOBILITY RADEON 9200 with 32-MB video memor y A TI MOBILITY RADEON 7500c with 32-MB video memor y 336970-001 336969-001 336968-001 V GA board shield (includes ther mal pads) 337017-001 325388-002.book Page 40 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â41 2. Remov e the PM2.5Ã15.0 1 and PM2.0Ã3.0 2 scre ws that secure the VGA board shield to the base enclosure. 3. Lift the upper left corner of the VGA board 3 to disconnect it from the system board. 4. Remov e the VGA board and shield 4 . 5. Disengage the shield clips 5 to remov e the VGA board from the shield. R emo v ing the VG A Boar d and Shield 325388-002.book Page 41 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â4 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. The VGA shield thermal pad 1 and VGA board thermal pad 2 assist in cooling the notebook. Inspect these pads and replace if necessary each time the shield is remo ved. R eplac ing the Thermal P a ds on the V G A Board and Shi eld Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the VGA board and shield. 5 .2 0 Mode m a nd Cable 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3) and remov e the following components: â Mini PCI communications board (Section 5.6) â Optical dri ve (Section 5.8) â K eyboard (Section 5.9) â Switch cov er (Section 5.10) Spare P ar t Number Information Modem board with cab le 336999-001 The modem board cable is also included in the Miscellaneous Cable Kit, spare par t number 3361973-001. 325388-002.book Page 42 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â43 â Speaker co v er (Section 5.11) â Display assembly (Section 5.15) â T op cov er (Section 5.16) â VGA board and shield (Section 5.19) 2. Disconnect the modem cable 1 from the system board. 3. Lift the left side of the modem board 2 to disconnect it from the system board. 4. Remov e the modem board. R emo ving the Modem Boar d and Cable Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the modem and cable. 325388-002.book Page 43 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â44 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 2 1 Sys t e m B o a r d â When replacing the system board, ensure that the follo wing components are remov ed from the defectiv e system board and installed on the replacement system board: â Memory expansion boards (Section 5.5) â Mini PCI communications board (Section 5.6) â R TC battery (Section 5.7) â Processor (Section 5.14) â VGA board and shield (Section 5.19) â Modem and modem cable (Section 5.20) 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3) and remov e the following components: â Optical dri ve (Section 5.8) â K eyboard (Section 5.9) â Switch cov er (Section 5.10) â Speaker co v er (Section 5.11) â Display assembly (Section 5.12) â T op cov er (Section 5.16) Spare P ar t Number Information System board (includes ther mal pads) PC Card assembly (remo val not documented) 336964-001 337014-001 325388-002.book Page 44 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â45 2. Disconnect the SD Card slot board cable 1 from the system board. 3. Remov e the PM2.5Ã5.0 screw 2 that secures the SD Card slot board cable ground loop to the base enclosure and the PM2.5Ã5.0 scre w 3 that secures the system board to the base enclosure. R emo v ing the S y stem Boar d Sc r e w s 325388-002.book Page 45 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â4 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 4. Lift the right side of the system board approximately 1 inch 1 . If necessary , flex the back edge of the base enclosure out so that the parallel 2 and serial connectors 3 clear the base enclosure. 5. Slide the system board to the right at an angle 4 . 6. Remov e the system board. R emo ving the S y ste m Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the system board. 325388-002.book Page 46 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â1 6 Spec ific ations This chapter provides physical and performance specif ications. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Notebook Dimensions Height Width Depth 3.45 cm 25.40 cm 35.56 cm 1.4 in 10.0 in 14.0 in W eight (varies by configuration) 2.95 kg 6.5 lbs Stand-alone power requirements Nominal operating vo l t ag e A ver age operating power P eak operating po wer P ow er in Standby mode P ower in Hibernation mode 14.4 VDC 15.8 W 38.0 W < 800 mW < 100 mW Te m p e r a t u r e Operating (not writing optical) Operating (writing optical) Nonoperating 0°C to 35°C 5°C to 35°C -20°C to 60°C 32°F to 95°F 41°F to 95°F -4°F to 140°F 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
6â2 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90% 5% to 95%, 38.7°C (101 .6°F) maximum w et bu lb temperature Altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia) Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia) -15.24 to 3,048 m -15.24 to 12,192 m -50 to 10,000 ft -50 to 40,000 ft Shoc k Operating Nonoperating 10 g, 11 ms, half-sine 175 g, 2 ms, half-sine â Applicable product safety standards specify thermal limits for plastic surfaces. The notebook operates well within this range of temperatures. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Notebook (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â3 Ta b l e 6 - 2 15.4-inch, Wide UXGA, TFT Displa y Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 20.7 cm 33.1 cm 39.1 cm 8.1 in 13.0 in 15.4 in Number of colors up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 300:1 Brightness 170 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.173 à 0.173 mm 1920 à 1200 RGB v er tical str ipe Bac klight Edge lit Character displa y 80 à 25 Viewing angle /- 55° horizontal, /- 45° v er tical typical 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
6â4 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 3 15.4-inch, Wide SXGA , TFT Displa y Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 20.7 cm 33.1 cm 39.1 cm 8.1 in 13.0 in 15.4 in Number of colors up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 200:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.197 à 0.197 mm 1680 à 1050 RGB v er tical str ipe Bac klight Edge lit Character displa y 80 à 25 Viewing angle /- 65° horizontal, /- 50° v er tical typical 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â5 Ta b l e 6 - 4 15.4-inch, Wide XGA , TFT Displa y Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 20.7 cm 33.1 cm 39.1 cm 8.1 in 13.0 in 15.4 in Number of colors up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 200:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.259 à 0.259 mm 1280 à 800 RGB v er tical str ipe Bac klight Edge lit Character displa y 80 à 25 Viewing angle /- 65° horizontal, /- 50° v er tical typical 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
6â6 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-5 Har d Drives 80-GB 60-GB (5400- rpm) 60-GB (4200- rpm) 40-GB User capacity per drive 1 80-GB 60-GB 40-GB 30-GB Dimensions Height Width We i g h t 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 102 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g Interface type ATA - 5 ATA - 5 ATA - 5 ATA - 5 T ransfer rate Synchronous (maximum) Security 100 MB/ sec A T A secur ity 100 MB/ sec A T A secur ity 100 MB/ sec A T A secur ity 100 MB/ sec A T A secur ity Seek times (typical read, including setting) Single trac k A ver age Maximum 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms Logical bloc ks 2 156,301,488 117,210,240 78,140,160 58,605,120 Disk r otational speed 4200 r pm 5400 rpm 4200 r pm 4200 rpm Operating temperature 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) 1 1 GB = 1,073,741,824 bytes . 2 Actual drive specifications ma y differ slightly . Cer tain restr ictions and e xclusions app ly . Consult the HP Customer Suppor t Center f or details. 325388-002.book Page 6 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â7 Ta b l e 6 - 6 External A C Adapter W eight .304 kg 0.67 lb P ower supply Rated input v oltage Rated input current Rated frequency 100 to 240 V AC RMS 1.7 A RMS 47 to 63 Hz Ta b l e 6 - 7 8-cell, Primary Li-Ion Batter y P ack Dimensions Height Width Depth We i g h t 13.4 cm 9.2 cm 1.9 cm .43 kg 5.25 in 3.63 in .75 in .96 lb Energ y Vo l t a g e Amp-hour capacity W att-hour capacity 14.8 V 4.4 aH 64 wH Te m p e r a t u r e Operating Nonoperating 0°C to 60°C -20°C to 60°C 32°F to 140°F -4°F to 104°F Rechar ge time System in off mode or Standb y System on (depending on system pow er consumption) 2 to 3 hours 2 to 5 hours 325388-002.book Page 7 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
6â8 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-8 24X D VD/CD-R W Drive Applicable disc D VD-5, D VD-9, D VD-10 CD-RO M (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F orm 1 and 2) CD-R (read only) CD Plus Photo CD (single/multisession) CD-Bridge Center hole diameter 1.5 cm 0.59 in Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm 8 cm 4.72 in 3.15 in Disc thickness 1.2 mm 0.047 in Tr a c k p i t c h 0.74 µm Access time Random Full stroke < 150 ms < 225 ms A udio output level Line-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 128 KB/s Data transfer rate CD-R (24X) CD-R W (10X) CD-ROM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1500 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds 325388-002.book Page 8 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â9 T able 6-9 24X CD-R W Drive Applicable disc DV D - 5 , DV D - 9 , DV D - 1 0 CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F orm 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R (read only) CD Plus Photo CD (single/multisession) CD-Bridge Center hole diameter 1.5 cm 0.59 in Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm 8 cm 4.72 in 3.15 in Disc thickness 1.2 mm 0.047 in Tr a c k p i t c h 0.74 µm Access time Random Full stroke < 150 ms < 225 ms A udio output level Line-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 128 KB/s Data transfer rate CD-R (24X) CD-R W (10X) CD-ROM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD r ate) 1500 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD r ate) 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD r ate) 10,800 KB/s (1352 KB/ s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds 325388-002.book Page 9 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
6â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-10 8X D VD-ROM Drive Applicable disc D VD-5, D VD-9, D VD-10 CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R (read only) CD Plus Photo CD (single/multisession) CD-Bridge Center hole diameter 1.5 cm 0.59 in Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm 8 cm 4.72 in 3.15 in Disc thickness 1.2 mm 0.047 in Tr a c k p i t c h 0.74 µm Access time Random D VD media Full stroke D VD media Random CD media Full stroke CD media < 150 ms < 225 ms < 110 ms < 200 ms A udio output level Line-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 512 KB/s Data transfer rate Max 24X CD Max 8X D VD Multiword DMA mode 2 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1352 KB/ s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 10 seconds Stop time < 3 seconds 325388-002.book Page 10 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â11 T able 6-11 24X CD-R OM Drive Applicable disc DV D - 5 , DV D - 9 , DV D - 1 0 CD-ROM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R (read only) CD Plus Photo CD (single/multisession) CD-Bridge Center hole diameter 1.5 cm 0.59 in Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm 8 cm 4.72 in 3.15 in Disc thickness 1.2 mm 0.047 in Tr a c k p i t c h 1.6 µm Access time Random Full stroke < 150 ms < 300 ms A udio output level Line-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 128 KB/s Data transfer rate Sustained (16X) Va r i a b l e Multiword DMA mode 2 2400 KB/s 1500 to 3600 KB/s (10X to 24X) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 8 seconds Stop time < 4 seconds 325388-002.book Page 11 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
6â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-12 System DMA Har dware DMA System Function DMA0 A vailab le for audio DMA1* Enter tainment audio (def ault; alter nate = DMA0, DMA3, none) DMA2* Disk ette drive DMA3 ECP parallel por t LPT1 (def ault; alter nate = DMA0, none) DMA4 DMA controller cascading (not av ailable) DMA5* A v ailab le f or PC Card DMA6 Not assigned DMA7 Not assigned *PC Card controller ca n use DMA 1, 2, or 5. 325388-002.book Page 12 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â13 T able 6-13 System Interrupts Har dware IRQ System Function IRQ0 System timer IRQ1 K eyboard controller IRQ2 Cascaded IRQ3 COM2 IRQ4 COM1 IRQ5 A udio (default)* IRQ6 Disk ette drive IRQ7 P arallel por t IRQ8 Real time cloc k (R TC) IRQ9 Infrared IRQ10 System use IRQ11 System use IRQ12 Inter nal pointing stick or e xter nal mouse IRQ13 Coprocessor (not av ailable to any peripheral) IRQ14 IDE interf ace (hard drive and optical drive) IRQ15 System use â PC Cards ma y asser t IRQ3, IR Q4, IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, IRQ11, or IRQ15. Either the in frared or the serial por t may asser t IRQ3 or IRQ4. *Def ault configuration; audio possib le configurations are IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, or none. 325388-002.book Page 13 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
6â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-14 System I/O Addresses I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 000 - 00F DMA controller no . 1 010 - 01F Unused 020 - 021 Interrupt controller no . 1 022 - 024 Opti chipset configuration registers 025 - 03F Unused 02E - 02F 87334 âSuper I/Oâ configuration f or CPU 040 - 05F Counter/t imer registers 044 - 05F Unused 060 K eyboard controller 061 P or t B 062 - 063 Unused 064 K eyboard controller 065 - 06F Unused 070 - 071 NMI enable/real time cloc k (RTC) 072 - 07F Unused 080 - 08F DMA page registers 090 - 091 Unused 092 P or t A 093 - 09F Unused 0A0 - 0A1 Interrupt controller no . 2 325388-002.book Page 14 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â15 I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 0A2 - 0BF Unused 0C0 - 0DF DMA controller no . 2 0E0 - 0EF Unused 0F0 - 0F1 Coprocessor busy clear/reset 0F2 - 0FF Unused 100 - 16F Unused 170 - 177 Secondar y fix ed disk controller 178 - 1EF Unused 1F0 - 1F7 Pr imar y fix ed disk controller 1F8 - 200 Unused 201 Jo ystick (decoded in ESS1688) 202 - 21F Unused 220 - 22F Enter tainment audio 230 - 26D Unused 26E - 26 Unused 278 - 27F Unused 280 - 2AB Unused 2A0 - 2A7 Unu sed 2A8 - 2E7 Unu sed 2E8 - 2EF Reser ved serial por t T able 6-14 System I/O Addresses (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 15 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
6â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 2F0 - 2F7 Unused 2F8 - 2FF Infrared por t 300 - 31F Unused 320 - 36F Unused 370 - 377 Secondar y diskette driv e controller 378 - 37F P arallel por t (LPT1/def ault) 380 - 387 Unused 388 - 38B FM synthesizerâOPL3 38C - 3AF Unused 3B0 - 3BB V GA 3BC - 3BF Reser ved (parallel por t/no EPP suppor t) 3C0 - 3DF V GA 3E0 - 3E1 PC Card controller in CPU 3E2 - 3E3 Unu sed 3E8 - 3EF Inter nal modem 3F0 - 3F7 âAâ diskette controller 3F8 - 3FF Serial por t (COM1/def ault) CF8 - CFB PCI configuration inde x register (PCIDIV O-1) CFC - CFF PCI configuration data register (PCIDIV O-1) T able 6-14 System I/O Addresses (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 16 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ1 A Conn ec tor P in A ssi gnm ents Ta b l e A - 1 RJ-45 Netw ork Interface Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 T ransmit 5 Unused 2 T ransmit â 6 Receiv e â 3 Receiv e 7 Unused 4U n u s e d 8 U n u s e d 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 8 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Aâ2 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e A - 2 RJ-11 Modem Pin Signal Pin Signal 1U n u s e d 4 U n u s e d 2 Tip 5 Unused 3R i n g 6 U n u s e d Ta b l e A - 3 Universal Serial Bus Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 5 VDC 3 Data 2 Data â 4 Ground Ta b l e A - 4 S-Video Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Ground (Y) 3 Y -Luminance (Intensity) 2 Ground (C) 4 C-Chrominance (Color) 1 2 43 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ3 Ta b l e A - 5 External Monitor Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Red analog 9 5 VDC 2 Green analog 10 Ground 3 Blue analog 11 Monitor detect 4 Not connected 12 DDC 2B data 5 Ground 13 H orizontal sync 6 Ground analog 14 V er tical sync 7 Ground analog 15 DDC 2B cloc k 8 Ground analog 1 6 11 5 10 15 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Aâ4 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e A - 6 A udio Line-Out Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio out 2 Ground 2 1 Ta b l e A - 7 Micr ophone Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio in 2 Ground 2 1 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ5 Ta b l e A - 8 P arallel Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Strobe 14 Auto Linef eed 2 Data Bit 0 15 Error 3 Data Bit 1 16 Initialize Printer 4 Data Bit 2 17 Select In 5 Data Bit 3 18 Ground 6 Data Bit 4 19 Ground 7 Data Bit 5 20 Ground 8 Data Bit 6 21 Ground 9 Data Bit 7 22 Ground 10 Ackno wledge 23 Ground 11 Busy 24 Ground 12 P aper End 25 Ground 13 Select 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ1 B P o w er C ord Set Requirem ents 3-Con duc tor P o w er Cord Set The wide range input feature of the notebook permits it to operate from any line v oltage from 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 volts A C. The po wer cord set included with the notebook meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment is purchased. Po wer cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where the notebook is used. For more information on po wer cord set requirements, contact an HP authorized reseller or service pro vider . Gen eral R equiremen ts The follo wing requirements are applicable to all countries: â The length of the po wer cord se t must be at least 1.5 meters (5 feet) and a maximum of 2 meters (6.50 feet). â All po wer cord sets must be approv ed by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for e v aluation in the country where the po wer cord set will be used. â The po wer cord set must ha ve a minimum current capacity of 10 amps and a nominal v oltage rating of 125 or 250 vo lts A C, as required by each countryâ s po wer system. â The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical conf iguration of an EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C13 connector for mating with the ap pliance inlet on the back of the notebook. 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Bâ2 Maint enance and Serv ic e Guide P o wer Cor d Set Requirements Coun tr y-Spec ific Requirements 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements Country Accredited Agency Applicable Note Number A ustralia EANSW 1 A ustria O VE 1 Belgium CEBC 1 Canada CSA 2 Denmark DEMK O 1 Finland FIMK O 1 Fr a n c e U T E 1 Ger many VDE 1 Italy IMQ 1 Jap a n ME T I 3 The Netherlands KEMA 1 Norwa y NEMK O 1 Sweden SEMK O 1 Switzerland SEV 1 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
P o wer Co rd Set R equirements Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ3 United Kingdom BSI 1 United States UL 2 Notes 1. The fle xib le cord must be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm 2 conductor size . P ow er cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wall plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xib le cord must be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug m ust be a two-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , fle xib le cord , and wall plug m ust bear a âTâ mark and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentor i Law . The fle xib le cord must be T ype VC T or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm 2 conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-pole g rounding type with a J apanese Industri al Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration. 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements (Continued) Country Accredited Agency Applicable Note Number 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ1 C Sc r e w Li sting This appendix provides specif ication and reference information for the scre ws used in the notebook. All screws listed in this appendix are a v ailable in the Miscellaneous Scre w Kit, spare part number 337012-001. 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Câ2 Mainten ance and Servi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã9 . 5 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e C - 1 Phillips PM2.5Ã9.5 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 9.5 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo screws that secure th e hard drive to the notebook (documented in Section 5.3) 2 One screw that secures the optical drive to the notebook (documented in Section 5.8) 3 T wo screws that secure the di spla y assembly to the notebook (documented in Section 5.15) mm 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ3 Philli ps P M2 .5Ã7 .0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e C - 1 Phillips PM2.5Ã9.5 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 9.5 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: F our scre ws that secure the top cov er to the notebook (documented in Section 5.16) mm 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Câ4 Mainten ance and Servi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã7 .0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e C - 2 Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 5 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: Three screws that secure the displa y assembly to the notebook through the rear panel (documented in Section 5.15) mm 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ5 Philli ps P M2 .5Ã7 .0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e C - 2 Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 5 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: T wo screws that secure the top co v er to the notebook (documented in Section 5.16) mm 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Câ6 Mainten ance and Servi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã3 .5 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e C - 3 Phillips PM2.5Ã3.5 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 3.5 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: F our scre ws that secure the hard driv e to the hard driv e cov er and shield (documented in Section 5.3) mm 325388-002.book Page 6 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ7 Philli ps P M2 .5Ã5 . 0 Scr ew Locations Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 One screw that secures the memory e xpansion compar tment cov er to the notebook (documented in Section 5.5) 2 One screw that secures the Mini PC I compar tment cov er to the notebook (documented in Section 5.6) mm 325388-002.book Page 7 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Câ8 Mainten ance and Servi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã5 . 0 Scr ew Locations Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 Three scre ws that secure the speaker cov er to the notebook (documented in Section 5.11) 2 One screw that secures the f an to the notebook (documented in Section 5.12) mm 325388-002.book Page 8 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ9 Philli ps P M2 .5Ã5 . 0 Scr ew Locations Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the displa y assembly to the notebook through the rear panel (documented in Section 5.15) mm 325388-002.book Page 9 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Câ10 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã5 . 0 Scr ew Locations Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: T wo screws that secure the top co v er to the notebook in the hard drive ba y (documented in Section 5.16) mm 325388-002.book Page 10 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ11 Philli ps P M2 .5Ã5 . 0 Scr ew Location Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One scre w that secures the top cov er to the notebook (documented in Section 5.16) mm 325388-002.book Page 11 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Câ12 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã5 . 0 Scr ew Locations Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: T wo screws that secure the SD Card slot board and cab le to the notebook (documented in Section 5.18) mm 325388-002.book Page 12 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ13 Philli ps P M2 .5Ã5 . 0 Scr ew Location Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One scre w that secures the sy stem board to the notebook (documented in Section 5.21) mm 325388-002.book Page 13 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Câ14 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã15 .0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e C - 5 Phillips PM2.5Ã15.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 10 15.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo screws that secure th e k eyboard to the notebook (documented in Section 5.9) 2 Six screws that secure the top co ver to the notebook (documented in Section 5.16) mm 325388-002.book Page 14 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ15 Philli ps P M2 .5Ã15 .0 Sc r e w Location Ta b l e C - 5 Phillips PM2.5Ã15.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 10 15.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One scre w that secures the displa y assembly cab le to the notebook (documented in Section 5.15) mm 325388-002.book Page 15 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Câ16 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã15 .0 Sc r e w Location Ta b l e C - 5 Phillips PM2.5Ã15.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 10 15.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One scre w that secures the V GA shield to the notebook (documented in Section 5.19) mm 325388-002.book Page 16 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ17 Phill ips P M 2 . 5 Ã3 . 0 Scr ew Location Ta b l e C - 6 Phillips PM2.5Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 1 3.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One scre w that secures the speaker cov er to the notebook (documented in Section 5.11) mm 325388-002.book Page 17 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Câ18 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 . 0Ã3 . 0 Scr ew L ocat ions Ta b l e C - 7 Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 2 3.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 1 One screw that secures th e top cov er to the notebook (documented in Section 5.16) 2 One screw that secures the V GA shield to the notebook (documented in Section 5.19) mm 325388-002.book Page 18 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ19 Phillips P M2 .0Ã9 .0 S pring-L oaded Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e C - 8 Phillips PM2.0Ã9.0 Spring-Loaded Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 9.0 mm 2.0 mm 6.0 mm Where used: F our scre ws that secure th e heat sink to the notebook (documented in Section 5.13) mm 325388-002.book Page 19 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Câ20 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Phillips P M1. 5Ã3 .0 S c r e w L ocations Ta b l e C - 9 Phillips PM1.5Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 2 3.0 mm 1.5 mm 2.0 mm Where used: T wo screws that secure the Blue tooth board to the top co ver (documented in Section 5.17) mm 325388-002.book Page 20 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ1 In de x 1394 connector, location 1â29 802.11b wireless LAN, spare part numbers 3â9, 5â11 A AC adapter spare part number 3â15 specifications 6â7 applications key, location 1â31 audio line-out jack location 1â27 pin assignments Aâ4 audio troubleshooting 2â21 B base enclosure, spare part number 3â7 battery bay, location 1â35 battery pack removal 5â4 spare part number 3â9 specifications 6â7 battery pack release latch, location 1â35 Bluetooth wireless communications board removal 5â36 spare part number 3â5 , 3â9 , 5â11 , 5â36 bottom components 1â34 C cables, service considerations 4â2 caps lock light, location 1â33 CD-ROM drive removal 5â14 spare part number 5â14 specifications 6â11 CD-RW drive, specifications 6â9 components bottom 1â34 front 1â26 keyboard 1â30 left-side 1â26 rear panel 1â28 right-side 1â28 top 1â32 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Inde xâ2 Mainte nance and Serv ice Gui de Inde x Computer Setup Advanced Menu 2â5 File Menu 2â3 overview 2â1 Security Menu 2â4 connector pin assignments audio line-out jack Aâ4 external monitor connector Aâ3 microphone jack Aâ4 modem jack Aâ2 monitor connector Aâ3 network jack Aâ1 RJ-11 telephone jack Aâ2 RJ-45 network jack Aâ1 S-Video connector Aâ2 Universal Serial Bus (USB) connector Aâ2 connectors, service considerations 4â2 cursor control keys, location 1â31 D design overview 1â36 Diagnostics for Windows 2â1 disassembly sequence chart 5â3 display assembly removal 5â26 spare part numbers 3â3, 5â26 specifications 6â3, 6â4, 6â5 display inverter, spare part number 3â3, 5â26 display lid switch, location 1â33 display release latch, location 1â27 DMA specifications 6â12 docking connector cover 3â10 docking connector, location 1â35 drives, preventing damage 4â3 DVD-ROM drive removal 5â14 spare part number 5â14 specifications 6â10 E electrostatic discharge 4â4, 4â7 external monitor connector location 1â29 pin assignments Aâ3 F F1 through F12 function keys, location 1â31 fan removal 5â21 spare part number 3â7 , 5â21 features 1â22 feet illustrated 3â10 locations 5â8 Fn key, location 1â31 front components 1â26 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Inde x Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ3 G grounding equipment and methods 4â6 H hard drive OS loading problems 2â17 removal 5â6 spare part numbers 3â9, 3â14 , 5â6 specifications 6â6 hard drive bay, location 1â35 hard drive connector, illustrated 3â10 hard drive cover illustrated 3â10 removal 5â7 hard drive shield illustrated 3â10 removal 5â7 heat sink removal 5â22 spare part number 3â7, 5â22 I I/O address specifications 6â14 infrared port 1â28 internal keypad, location 1â31 interrupt specifications 6â13 K keyboard components 1â30 removal 5â15 spare part numbers 3â5, 5â15 troubleshooting 2â24 L left-side components 1â26 Logo Kit, spare part numbers 3â15 M mass storage devices, spare part numbers 3â14 memory expansion board removal 5â9 spare part numbers 3â9 memory expansion compartment cover illustrated 3â13 location 1â35 removal 5â9 microphone jack location 1â27 pin assignments Aâ4 Mini PCI communications board removal 5â11 spare part numbers 3â9, 5â11 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Inde xâ4 Mainte nance and Serv ice Gui de Inde x Mini PCI compartment cover illustrated 3â13 location 1â35 removal 5â11 Miscellaneous Cable Kit components 3â5, 3â12 spare part number 3â5, 3â12 , 3â13 Miscellaneous Doors/Covers Kit components 3â9 spare part number 3â9 Miscellaneous Plastics Kit components 3â3, 3â10 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â11 models 1â2 modem cable 3â12, 3â13 jack, pin assignments Aâ2 removal 5â42 spare part number 3â9, 5â42 troubleshooting 2â26 monitor connector location 1â29 pin assignments Aâ3 mute button, location 1â33 N network jack, pin assignments Aâ1 network, troubleshooting 2â26 nonfunctioning device, troubleshooting 2â15, 2â23 notebook specifications 6â1 num lk key, location 1â31 num lock light, location 1â33 O operating system loading, troubleshooting 2â16 optical drive location 1â27 removal 5â14 spare part numbers 3â5, 3â14 , 5â14 P packing precautions 4â4 parallel connector location 1â29 pin assignments Aâ5 password, clearing 1â24 PC Card assembly, spare part number 3â7 PC Card eject button, location 1â27 PC Card slot, location 1â27 PC Card space saver 3â10 plastic parts 4â2 pointing device, troubleshooting 2â25 port replicator, troubleshooting 2â15 power button 1â32 power connector 1â28 power cord, spare part numbers 3â15, 3â16 power management features 1â25 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Inde x Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ5 power, troubleshooting 2â9 processor removal 5â24 spare part numbers 3â7, 5â24 R rear panel components 1â28 removal preliminaries 4â1 procedures 5â1 replacement preliminaries 4â1 procedures 5â1 right-side components 1â28 RJ-11 telephone jack location 1â29 pin assignments Aâ2 RJ-45 network jack location 1â29 pin assignments Aâ1 RTC (real time clock) battery illustrated 3â13 removal 5â13 RTC (real time clock) battery cover illustrated 3â13 location 1â34 S Screw Kit, spare part number 3â16 SD Card slot board removal 5â38 spare part number 3â7, 5â38 SD Card slot board cable 3â12 , 3â13 SD Card slot, location 1â27 security cable slot, location 1â29 serial number 3â1, 5â2 service considerations 4â2 speaker cover removal 5â19 spare part numbers 3â5, 5â19 speaker cover cable 3â12, 3â13 speakers, location 1â32 specifications AC adapter 6â7 battery pack 6â7 CD-ROM drive 6â11 CD-RW drive 6â9 display 6â3, 6â4, 6â5 DMA 6â12 DVD-ROM drive 6â10 hard drive 6â6 I/O addresses 6â14 interrupts 6â13 notebook 6â1 static shielding materials 4â7 S-Video connector location 1â29 pin assignments Aâ2 switch cover illustrated 3â10 removal 5â18 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Inde xâ6 Mainte nance and Serv ice Gui de Inde x system board removal 5â44 spare part number 3â7, 5â44 T thermal pad replacement 5â22 spare part number 3â7, 5â22 tools required 4â1 top components 1â32 top cover removal 5â30 spare part numbers 3â5, 5â30 TouchPad buttons, location 1â33 TouchPad light, location 1â33 TouchPad on/off button, location 1â33 TouchPad scroll zones, location 1â33 TouchPad, location 1â33 transporting precautions 4â4 troubleshooting audio 2â21 Computer Setup 2â2 flowcharts 2â7 keyboard 2â24 modem 2â26 network 2â26 nonfunctioning device 2â15 , 2â23 operating system loading 2â16 overview 2â1 pointing device 2â25 port replicator 2â15 power 2â9 video 2â13 U Universal Serial Bus (USB) connector location 1â29 pin assignments Aâ2 V vent, location 1â29, 1â34 VGA board removal 5â40 spare part numbers 3â7, 5â40 VGA board shield removal 5â40 spare part number 3â7 , 5â40 video troubleshooting 2â13 volume buttons, location 1â33 W Windows logo key, location 1â31 wireless antenna disconnection 5â12 spare part number 3â7 wireless device button, location 1â27 workstation precautions 4â5 325388-002.book Page 6 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
© 2003 He wlett-Packard De velopment Company , L.P . Microsoft® and W indows® are U.S. re gistered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Intel®, Pentium®, an d SpeedStep® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. SD Logo is a trademark of its proprietor . Bluetooth® is a trademark o wned by its proprietor and used b y He wlett-Packard Compan y under license. The information contained herein is su bject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompan ying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty . HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Maintenance and S erv ice Gui de HP P av i lio n Wi descr een Notebook zt3000 HP Co mpaq Busine ss Not ebook nx7 000 Co mpaq Pr esar io W ides cr een Notebook P C X1000 Second E dition October 200 3 F irst E dition Jul y 2003 Document P art Nu mber: 3 25 38 8-002 325388-002.book Page ii Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide iii Cont ent s 1 Product Description 1.1 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â2 1.2 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â22 1.3 Clearing a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â24 1.4 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â25 1.5 External Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â26 1.6 Design Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1â36 2 Troubleshooting 2.1 Computer Setup and Diagnostics Utilities . . . . . . . . 2â1 Using Computer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â2 Selecting from the File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â3 Selecting from the Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â4 Selecting from the Advanced Me nu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â5 2.2 Troubleshooting Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2â7 3 Illustrated Parts Catalog 3.1 Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â1 3.2 Notebook Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â2 3.3 Miscellaneous Plastics Kit Components . . . . . . . . . 3â10 3.4 Miscellaneous Cable Kit Components . . . . . . . . . . 3â12 3.5 Miscellaneous Doors/Covers Kit Components . . . . 3â13 3.6 Mass Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â14 3.7 Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3â15 325388-002.book Page iii Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
i v Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Cont en ts 4 Removal and Replacement Preliminaries 4.1 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â1 4.2 Service Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Plastic Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â2 4.3 Preventing Damage to Removable Drives . . . . . . . . 4â3 4.4 Preventing Electrostatic Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â4 4.5 Packaging and Transporting Precautions . . . . . . . . . 4â4 4.6 Workstation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â5 4.7 Grounding Equipment and Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4â6 5 Removal and Replacement Procedures 5.1 Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â2 5.2 Disassembly Sequence Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â3 5.3 Preparing the Notebook for Di sassembly . . . . . . . . . 5â4 5.4 Notebook Feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â8 5.5 Memory Expansion Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â9 5.6 Mini PCI Communications Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â11 5.7 RTC Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â13 5.8 Optical Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â14 5.9 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â15 5.10 Switch Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â18 5.11 Speaker Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â19 5.12 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â21 5.13 Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â22 5.14 Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â24 5.15 Display Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â26 5.16 Top Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â30 5.17 Bluetooth Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â36 5.18 SD Card Slot Board and Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â38 5.19 VGA Board and Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â40 5.20 Modem and Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â42 5.21 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5â44 325388-002.book Page iv Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Cont en ts Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide v 6 Specifications A Connector Pin Assignments B Power Cord Set Requirements 3-Conductor Power Cord Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ1 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ1 Country-Specific Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bâ2 C Screw Listing Index 325388-002.book Page v Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â1 1 Pr oduc t D esc ription The HP Pa vilion W idescreen Notebook zt3000, HP Compaq Business Notebook nx7000, and Compaq Presario W idescreen Notebook PC X1000 of fer adv anced modularity , a Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 Processor-M processor with 64-bit architecture, industry-leading A T I MOBILITY RADEON Accelerated Graphics Port (A GP) implementation, and extensi ve multimedia support. HP P av ilion W idesc reen Not ebook zt3000, HP Co mpaq Busine ss Not ebook nx7 000, and Co mpaq Pr esar io W ides cr een Notebook P C X1000 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
1â2 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1.1 M o d e l s Notebook models are sho wn in T ables 1-1 through 1-4. Ta b l e 1 - 1 HP P avilion zt3000, HP Compaq nx7000, and Compaq Presario X1000 Model Naming Con ventions Key C P 170 Y5 80 Y Ci 10 P XXXXXX-XXX 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 Ke y Description Options 1 Brand/Series designator V = HP P avilion zt3000 C = HP Compaq nx7000 P = Compaq Presario X1000 2 Processor type P = Mobile In tel P entium 4 Processor-M 3 Processor speed 170 = 1.7 GHz 160 = 1.6 GHz 150 = 1.5 GHz 140 = 1.4 GHz 130 = 1.3 GHz 4D i s p l a y t y p e / size/resolution Z = wide UXGA (1920 à 1200) Y = wide SXGA (1680 à 1050) W = wide XGA (1280 à 800) 5 = 15.4 in 5 Hard drive size 80 = 80 GB 60 = 60 GB 40 = 40 GB 6 Optical drive designator C = CD-R OM D = D VD-ROM Y = D VD RW W = D VD/CD-RW combo drive 7 Integrated communication/ wireless de vice C = combination LAN/modem b = 802.11b i = 802.11b Bluetooth® 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â3 Ta b l e 1 - 1 HP P avilion zt3000, HP Compaq nx7000, and Compaq Presario X1000 Model Naming Con vention (Continued) 8 RAM 10 = 1024 MB 51 = 512 MB 25 = 256 MB 9 Operating system H = Microsoft® Windows® XP Home P = Windows XP Pro 10 SKU# Ta b l e 1 - 2 HP P avilion zt3000 Models All HP Compaq nx7000 models f eature: â T ouchP ad pointing de vice â 8-cell, 4.4-wH lithium io n (Li-Ion) batter y pack â 1-year w a rranty on par ts and labor V P 170 Y5 80 Y Cb 51 H Asia P acific DR255A UUF V P 160 Y5 80 Y Cb 51 H Asia P acific DR260A UUF V P 160 Y5 80 Y Cb 25 H T aiw an DR253A AB0 and DR258A AB0 V P 160 Y5 80 W Ci 51 P K orea DR248A AB1 V P 160 Y5 60 Y Ci 51 H Hong K ong DR249A AB5 Thailand DR250A AKL V P 160 Y5 60 Y Ci 51 P A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DR244A ABG 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
1â4 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion V P 160 Y5 60 W Ci 51 P K orea DR247A AB1 V P 160 Y5 40 W Cb 25 H Asia P acific DR254A UUF T aiwan DR256A AB0 V P 160 W5 60 Y Cb 51 H Greece DP778E AB7 Switz er land DP778E UUZ V P 160 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Hong K ong DR257A AB5 Thailand DR257A AKL V P 150 Y5 40 W Ci 25 P P eopleâ s Republic of China DR245A AB2 V P 150 W5 80 Y Cb 51 H United States DM779A ABA V P 150 W5 60 Y Cb 51 H United States DM778A ABA V P 150 W5 40 Y Cb 51 H Switzerland DP777E UUZ V P 150 W5 40 Y Cb 25 H T aiw an DR252A AB0 V P 150 W5 40 Y Cn 51 P A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DR243A ABG V P 150 W5 40 W Cb 51 H Denmark Europe Ger many Italy DP779E AB Y DP779E ABB DP782E ABD DP779E ABZ The Netherlands Saudi Arabia Spain United Kingdom DP783E ABH DP779E ABV DP779E ABE DP779E ABU Ta b l e 1 - 2 HP P avilion zt3000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â5 V P 150 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Asia P acific DR259A UUF V P 140 W5 80 Y Cb 51 P Latin America DR205A ABM V P 140 W5 60 W Cb 51 H United States DM781A ABA V P 140 W5 40 Y Cb 51 H F rance DP786E ABF V P 140 W5 40 W Cb 51 H Fr a n c e Norwa y Ger many United States DP784E ABF DP785E ABN DM781E ABD DM783A ABA V P 140 W5 40 W Cb 51 P Latin America DR204A ABM V P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Belgium Denmark Fr a n c e Europe Greece Italy The Netherlands DP776E UUG DP776E AB Y DP776E ABF DP776E ABB DP776E AB7 DP776E ABZ DP776E ABH Norwa y P or tugal Saudi Arabia Spain Switzerland United Kingdom United States DP776E ABN DP776E AB9 DP776E ABV DP776E ABE DP776E UUZ DP776E ABU DP479U ABA V P 140 W5 40 W Ci 25 P K orea DR246A AB1 V P 140 W5 40 W Cn 25 P A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DR242A ABG V P 140 W5 40 D Cb 25 H T aiw an DR251A AB0 Ta b l e 1 - 2 HP P avilion zt3000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
1â6 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion Ta b l e 1 - 3 HP Compaq nx7000 Models All HP Compaq nx7000 models f eature: â T ouchP ad pointing de vice â 8-cell, 4.4-wH Li-Ion batter y pack â 1-year w a rranty on par ts and labor C P 160 Y5 80 W Cb 51 P K orea DM942A AB1 C P 160 Y5 60 Y Ci 51 P F rance DG706T ABF C P 160 Y5 60 W Cb 51 P Belgium Czech Repub lic Denmark European Inter national Fr a n c e Ger many Greece Hungar y Israel Italy Jap a n DG706A UUG DG706A AKB DG706A ABY DG706A ABB DG706A ABF DG706A ABD DG706A AB7 DG706A AKC DG706A ABT DG706A ABZ DM436A ABJ The Netherlands Norwa y Po l a n d P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov enia Spain Sweden/Finland Switzerland Tu r k e y United Kingdom DG706A ABH DG706A ABN DG706A AKD DG706A AB9 DG706A ACB DG706A AB V DG706A AKN DG706A ABE DG706A AK8 DG706A UUZ DG706A AB8 DG706A AB U C P 160 Y5 60 W Ci 51 P Hong K ong DR758P AB5 C P 160 W5 80 W Cb 51 H T aiw an DR749P AB0 C P 160 W5 80 W Cb 51 P Asia P acific Ta i w a n DR752P UUF DR748P AB0 Thailand DR752P AKL C P 160 W5 60 Y Cb 51 P Thailand DM434A AKL 325388-002.book Page 6 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â7 C P 160 W5 60 W Cb 51 P Asia P acific Brazil F rench Canada DM945A UUF and DL855A UUF DL855A AC4 DL855A ABC Jap a n Latin America Thailand United States DL855A ABJ DL855A ABM DM945A AKL DL855A ABA C P 160 W5 40 D Cb 25 P T aiw an DN896A AB0 P eopleâ s Republic of China DS303P AB2 C P 160 W5 40 D CN 25 P Latin America DP093A ABM United States DP093A ABA C P 150 Y5 80 W Cb 51 P A ustralia DR764P ABG C P 150 Y5 80 W Ci 51 P A ustralia DR760P ABG C P 150 Y5 60 W Cb 51 P Asia P acific DN894A UUF K orea DM941A AB1 C P 150 Y5 60 W Cb 25 P Hong K ong DR757P AB5 C P 150 Y5 60 W Ci 25 P Hong K ong DS304P AB5 C P 150 Y5 40 W Cb 25 P A ustralia DR762P ABG C P 150 Y5 40 W Ci 51 H Europe DJ223S ABB Ta b l e 1 - 3 HP Compaq nx7000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 7 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
1â8 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion C P 150 Y5 40 W Ci 51 P Belgium Czech Repub lic Denmark Europe Fr a n c e Ger many Greece Hungar y Israel Italy The Netherlands DG705A UUG DG705A AKB DG705A ABY DG705A ABB DG705A ABF and DG705T ABF DG705A ABD and DG705T ABD DG705A AB7 DG705A AKC DG705A ABT DG705A ABZ DG705A ABH Norwa y Po l a n d P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov enia Spain Sweden/Finland Switzerland Tu r k e y United Kingdom DG705A ABN DG705A AKD DG705A AB9 DG705A ACB DG705A AB V DG705A AKN DG705A ABE and DG705T ABE DG705A AK8 DG705A UUZ DG705A AB8 DG705A AB U and DG705T ABU C P 150 Y5 40 W Ci 25 P Italy DJ218S ABZ C P 150 Y5 40 C Cb 51 P K orea DM940A AB1 C P 150 W5 80 W Cb 51 H Asia P acific A ustralia/Ne w Zealand Jap a n DL848A UUF DL848A ABG DL848A ABJ Ko r e a Ta i w a n Thailand DL848A AB1 DL850A AB0 DL848A AKL C P 150 W5 80 W Cb 51 P Asia P acific A ustralia/Ne w Zealand Jap a n DL847A UUF DL847A ABG DL847A ABJ Ko r e a Ta i w a n Thailand DL847A AB1 DL849A AB0 DL847A AKL C P 150 W5 80 W Cb 25 P Asia P acific DM943A UUF C P 150 W5 60 W Cb 25 H T aiw an DR747P AB0 Ta b l e 1 - 3 HP Compaq nx7000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 8 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â9 C P 150 W5 60 W Cb 25 P P eopleâ s Republic of China DS302P AB2 T aiwan DR746P AB0 C P 150 W5 40 W Cb 51 H Switzerland DJ169S UUZ C P 150 W5 40 W Cb 51 P Asia P acific DN728A UUF C P 150 W5 40 W Cb 25 P Asia P acific DM944A UUF Austr alia DS312P ABG C P 150 W5 40 D Cb 25 H T aiwan DL842A AB0 C P 150 W5 40 D Cb 25 P P eopleâ s Republic of China DQ885P AB2, DL838A AB2, and DS301P AB2 C P 140 Y5 60 W Cb 25 P A ustralia DR759P ABG C P 140 Y5 40 W Cb 51 P K orea DM939A AB1 C P 140 Y5 40 W Cb 25 P A ustralia DR763P ABG Hong K ong DR756P AB5 C P 140 Y5 40 D Cb 25 P A ustralia DR761P ABG C P 140 Y5 30 W Cb 25 H Hong K ong DR755P AB5 Ta b l e 1 - 3 HP Compaq nx7000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 9 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
1â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion C P 140 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Sweden DJ200S AK8 C P 140 W5 60 W Cb 25 H Asia P acific A ustralia/Ne w Zealand Hong K ong Jap a n DL844A UUF DL844A ABG DM437A AB5 DL844A ABJ Ko r e a Ta i w a n Thailand DL844A AB1 DL846A AB0 DL844A AKL C P 140 W5 60 W Cb 25 P Asia P acific A ustralia/Ne w Zealand Jap a n DL843A UUF DL843A ABG DL843A ABJ Ko r e a Ta i w a n Thailand DL843A AB1 DL845A AB0 DL843A AKL C P 140 W5 60 W Ci 51 P Asia P acific DL853A UUF Hong K ong DL853A ABF C P 140 W5 60 W Nb 51 H Europe DQ822C ABB C P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Japan DM435A ABJ T aiwan DR750P AB0 C P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 P Thailand DM433A AKL C P 140 W5 40 W Ci 51 H Ger many DJ202S ABD Ta b l e 1 - 3 HP Compaq nx7000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 10 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â11 C P 140 W5 40 W Ci 25 P Belgium Czech Repub lic Denmark Europe Fr a n c e Ger many Greece Hungar y Israel DG704A UUG and DG704T UUG DG704A AKB DG704A ABY DG704A ABB DG704A ABF , DG704T ABF , and DJ231S ABF DG420A ABD DG704A AB7 DG704A AKC DG704A ABT Italy The Netherlands Norwa y Po l a n d P or tugal Russia Saudi Arabia Slov enia Spain Sweden/Finland Switzerland Tu r k e y United Kingdom DG704A ABZ DG704A ABH DG704A ABN DG704A AKD DG704A AB9 DG704A ACB DG704A AB V DG704A AKN DG704A ABE DG704A AK8 DG704A UUZ DG704A AB8 DG704A AB U C P 140 W5 40 W Cn 25 P Brazil Latin America DP094A AC4 DP094A ABM United States DP094A ABA C P 140 W5 40 D Cb 51 P Brazil F rench Canada DL854A AC4 DL854A ABC Latin America United States DL854A ABM DL854A ABA and DP076C ABA C P 140 W5 40 D Cb 25 H Hong K ong DR754P AB5 T aiwan DR745P AB0 C P 140 W5 40 D Cb 25 P Asia P acific A ustralia Ko r e a P eopleâ s Republic of China DM438A UUF DS311P ABG DM938A AB1 DL837A AB2 and DM438A AB2 Ta i w a n Thailand DR744P AB0 and DR751P AB0 DM438A AKL Ta b l e 1 - 3 HP Compaq nx7000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 11 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion C P 140 W5 40 C Cb 25 P Asia P acific DR850P UUF K orea DM937A AB1 C P 140 W5 30 D Cb 25 H Hong K ong DR753P AB5 C P 130 Y5 80 W Cb 51 P United States DP113S ABA C P 130 Y5 40 W Cb 51 P United States DP119S ABA C P 130 W5 40 W Cb 25 P T aiwan DN893A AB0 C P 130 W5 40 W Ci 25 P Asia P acific DL852A UUF Hong K ong DL852A AB5 C P 130 W5 40 D Cb 25 H Asia P acific A ustralia/Ne w Zealand Hong K ong DL840A UUF DL840A ABG DL840A AB5 Jap a n Ko r e a Thailand DL840A ABJ DL840A AB1 DL840A AKL C P 130 W5 40 D Cb 25 P Asia P acific A ustralia/Ne w Zealand Hong K ong Jap a n Ja pan (English) Ko r e a DL839A UUF DL839A ABG DL839A AB5 DL839A ABJ DL839A ACF DL839A AB1 and DM936A AB1 Ta i w a n Thailand United States DL841A AB0 and DN895A AB0 DL839A AKL DH904A ABA C P 130 W5 40 D Ci 25 P Asia P acific DL851A UUF Hong K ong DL851A AB5 C P 130 W5 40 C Cb 25 P Asia P acific DR852P UUF K orea DM935A AB1 Ta b l e 1 - 3 HP Compaq nx7000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 12 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â13 Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models All Compaq Presario X1000 models feature: â T ouchPad pointing de vice â 8-cell, 4.4-wH Li-Ion batter y pack â 1-year w a rranty on par ts and labor X1094 P 160 Y5 80 Y Cb 51 H A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DR824A ABG X1082 P 160 Y5 80 Y Cb 51 H A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DR278A ABG X1064 P 160 Y5 80 Y Ci 51 H K orea DN625A AB1 X1081 P 160 Y5 80 W Cb 51 H A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DR277A ABG Asia P acific DR277A UUF X1045 P 160 Y5 80 W Cb 51 H Asia P acific DN601A UUF K orea DN606A AB1 X1030 P 160 Y5 60 Y Cb 51 H A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DN591A ABG X1071 P 160 Y5 60 Y Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DQ977A AB2 X1046 P 160 Y5 60 W Cb 51 H K orea DN607A AB1 X1029 P 160 Y5 60 W Cb 25 H A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DN600A ABG X1073 P 160 Y5 60 W Ci 51 H Hong K ong DR269A AB5 K orea DR269A AB1 325388-002.book Page 13 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion X1070 P 160 Y5 60 D Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DQ976A AB2 X1074 P 160 Y5 60 D Ci 51 H Hong K ong DR270A AB5 X1091 P 160 Y5 40 W Ci 25 H K orea DR287A AB1 X1093 P 160 W5 80 Y Cb 51 H A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DR823A ABG X1097 P 160 W5 8 0 W Ci 51 H A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DR824A ABG X1140 P 160 W5 60 Y Cb 51 H United Kingdom DP772E AB U X1155 P 160 W5 6 0 Y Ci 51 H Sweden DP775E AK8 X1090 P 160 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Asia P acific DR286A UUF X1076 P 160 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Asia P acific DR272A UUF X1066 P 150 Z5 80 Y Ci 51 H Asia P acific DN627A UUF X1015 P 150 Y5 80 Y Cb 10 H United States DN624A ABA X1086 P 150 Y5 80 Y Cb 51 H Hong K ong DR282A AB5 Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 14 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â15 X1085 P 150 Y5 80 W Cb 51 H Hong K ong DR281A AB5 X1056 P 150 Y5 60 Y Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DN617A AB2 X1049 P 150 Y5 60 W Cb 51 H Hong K ong DN610A AB5 X1023 P 150 Y5 60 W Cb 51 H Asia P acific DN584A UUF X1069 P 150 Y5 60 W Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DQ975A AB2 X1084 P 150 Y5 60 W Ci 25 H K orea DR280A AB1 X1055 P 150 Y5 60 D Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DN616A AB2 X1040 P 150 W5 80 Y Cb 51 H United States DM774A ABA X1089 P 150 W5 80 W Cb 51 H T aiwan DR285A AB0 X1050 P 150 W5 60 Y Cb 51 H Hong K ong DN611A AB5 X1020 P 150 W5 60 Y Cb 51 H The Netherlands DM416A ABH X1088 P 150 W5 60 W Cb 51 H T aiwan DR284A AB0 Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 15 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion X1079 P 150 W5 60 W Cb 51 H T aiwan DR275A AB0 X1044 P 150 W5 60 W Cb 51 H K orea DN605A AB1 X1032 P 150 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Asia P acific DN593A UUF X1058 P 150 W5 60 W Cb 25 H K orea DN619A AB1 X1054 P 150 W5 60 W Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DN615A AB2 X1010 P 150 W5 40 W Cb 51 H Denmark P or tugal DL963A ABY DL963A AB9 Spain United Kingdom DL963A ABE DL963A ABU X1068 P 150 W5 40 W Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DQ974A AB2 X1028 P 150 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Asia P acific DN589A UUF X1067 P 150 W5 40 D Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DQ973A AB2 X1020 P 140 Y5 80 Y Cb 10 P United States DK572A ABA X1063 P 140 Y5 60 W Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DN623A AB2 Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 16 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â17 X1022 P 140 Y5 60 W Cb 25 H Asia P acific DN583A UUF X1065 P 140 Y5 60 W Ci 25 H Asia P acific DN626A UUF X1048 P 140 Y5 40 W Cb 25 H Hong K ong DN609A AB5 X1083 P 140 Y5 40 W Ci 25 H Asia P acific DR279A UUF K orea DR279A AB1 X1095 P 140 Y5 40 C Cb 25 H Asia P acific DR825A UUF X1028 P 140 W5 80 Y Cb 51 P United States DL898A ABA X1037 P 140 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Thailand DN598A AKL X1036 P 140 W5 60 W Cb 51 H T aiwan DN597A AB0 X1018 P 140 W5 60 W Cb 51 H United States DK574A ABA X1010 P 140 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Canada (English) DL857A ABL F rench Canada DL857A ABC X1007 P 140 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Sweden/Finland DL964A AK8 X1001 P 140 W5 60 W Cb 51 H United States DK575A ABA Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 17 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion X1057 P 140 W5 60 W Cb 25 H K orea DN618A AB1 X1053 P 140 W5 60 W Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DN614A AB2 X1092 P 140 W5 6 0 W Ci 25 H K orea DR822A AB1 X1087 P 140 W5 60 D Cb 51 H T aiwan DR283A AB0 X1078 P 140 W5 60 D Cb 51 H T aiwan DR274A AB0 X1043 P 140 W5 40 Y Cb 51 H K orea DN604A AB1 X1016 P 140 W5 40 Y Cb 51 H F rance DM415A ABF Italy DM415A ABZ X1110 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 51 H Sweden DP773E AK8 X1080 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 51 H Thailand DR276A AKL X1062 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 51 H Asia P acific DN622A UUF X1030 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 51 H United States DM773A ABA X1012 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 51 H F rance DL965A ABF Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 18 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â19 X1105 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H United Kingdom DP771E AB U X1077 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H T aiwan DR273A AB0 X1075 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Asia P acific DR271A UUF X1052 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DN613A AB2 X1050 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Canada English F rench Canada DP485U ABL DP485U ABC United States DM777A ABA X1042 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H K orea DN603A AB1 X1002 P 140 W5 40 W Cb 25 H United States DM771A ABA X1115 P 140 W5 4 0 W Ci 51 H Sweden DP774E AK8 X1096 P 140 W5 4 0 W Ci 25 H Asia P acific DR826A UUF T aiwan DR826A AB0 X1051 P 140 W5 40 D Cb 25 H P eopleâ s Republic of China DN612A AB2 X1072 P 140 W5 30 W Cb 25 H Hong K ong DR268A AB5 X1021 P 130 Y5 40 D Cb 25 H Asia P acific DN582A UUF Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 19 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion X1038 P 130 W5 60 W Cb 51 H Thailand DN599A AKL X1010 P 130 W5 60 W Cb 51 H United States DK571A ABA X1035 P 130 W5 60 D Cb 51 H T aiwan DN596A AB0 X1006 P 130 W5 40 Y Cb 51 H F rance DM933A ABF X1060 P 130 W5 40 W Cb 51 H Thailand DN620A AKL X1012 P 130 W5 40 W Cb 51 H United States DN585A ABA X1061 P 130 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Asia P acific DN621A UUF X1047 P 130 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Hong K ong DN608A AB5 X1041 P 130 W5 40 W Cb 25 H K orea DN602A AB1 X1031 P 130 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Asia P acific DN592A UUF X1005 P 130 W5 40 W Cb 25 H Belgium Denmark Fr a n c e Italy Latin America DL681A UUG DL681A ABY DL681A ABF DL681A ABZ DL858A ABM The Netherlands P or tugal Spain Sweden/Finland United Kingdom DL681A ABH DL681A AB9 DL681A ABE DL681A AK8 DL681A ABU Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 20 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â21 X1034 P 130 W5 40 D Cb 25 H T aiwan DN595A AB0 X1033 P 130 W5 40 D Cb 25 H Asia P acific DN594A UUF Thailand DN594A AKL X1027 P 130 W5 40 D Cb 25 H A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DN588A ABG X1040 P 130 W5 40 C Cb 25 H K orea DN601A AB1 X1026 P 130 W5 40 C Cb 25 H Asia P acific A ustralia/Ne w Zealand DN587A UUF DN587A ABG Thailand DN587A AKL Ta b l e 1 - 4 Compaq Presario X1000 Models (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 21 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1. 2 F e a t u r e s â Mobile Intel Pentium 4 Processo r -M 1.7-, 1.6-, 1.5-, 1.4-, or 1.3-GHz processors with 400-MHz processor side b us and 512-KB L2 cache, v arying b y notebook model â 15.4-inch wide UXGA (1920 Ã 1200), wide SXGA (1680 Ã 1050), or wide XGA (1280 Ã 800) TFT display with ov er 16.7 million colors, varying b y notebook model â A TI MOBILITY RADEON graphics with 32- or 64-MB DDR SDRAM â 80-, 60-, or 40-GB high-capacity hard dri ve, v arying by notebook model â 256-MB high-performance synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), expandable to 2.0 GB â W indo ws XP Home or W indo ws XP Pro, v arying by notebook model â Full-size W indo ws 98 ke yboard â T ouchPad pointing de vice with on/of f button and dedicated scroll up/do wn surface â 56-Kbps V .92 modem inte grated on the system board â Integrated Secure Digital (SD) flash media slot â Integrated 10/100 netw ork interface card (NIC) â Integrated wireless support for Mini PCI 802.11a/b/g and Bluetooth ï local area network (LAN) de vices â Support for one T ype II PC Card slot with support for both 32-bit (CardBus) and 16-bit PC Cards â External 65-watt A C adapter with po wer cord â 8-cell Li-Ion battery pack â Harman/Kardon speakers (HP P a vilion zt3000 models only) 325388-002.book Page 22 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â2 3 â JBL Pro speakers (HP Compaq nx7000 and Compaq Presario X1000 models only) â Support for the follo wing optical dri ves: â 24X Max D VD/CD-R W combo dri ve â 8X Max D VD-R W dri ve â 24X Max CD-R OM dri ve â Connectors for: â Microphone â Stereo speaker/headphone â Infrared â DC po wer â External monitor â S-V ideo â USB (3) â RJ-45 (network interf ace card, [NIC]) â RJ-11 (modem) â Parallel â 1394 digital â One T ype II PC Card slot â Docking 325388-002.book Page 23 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1. 3 C l e a r i n g a P a s s w o r d If the notebook you are servicing has an unkno wn password, follo w these steps to clear the password. These steps also clear CMOS: 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (refer to Section 5.3, âPreparing the Notebook for Disassembly , â for more information). 2. Remov e the real time clock (R TC) battery (refer to Section 5.7, âR TC Batteryâ). 3. W ait approximately fi ve minutes. 4. Replace the R TC battery and reassemble the notebook. 5. Connect A C po wer to the notebook. Do not reinsert the battery pack at this time. 6. T urn on the notebook. All passwords and all CMOS settings ha ve been cleared. 325388-002.book Page 24 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â2 5 1. 4 P o w e r M a n a g e m e n t The notebook comes with po wer management features that extend battery operating time and conserv e power . The notebook supports the follo wing po wer management features: â Standby â Hibernation â Setting customization by the user â Hotke ys for setting le vel of performance â Battery calibration â Lid switch Standby/resume â Po wer/Standby b utton â Adv anced Conf iguration and Po wer Management (A CP) compliance 325388-002.book Page 25 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1 .5 Extern al Com ponents The external components on the front and left-side of the notebook are sho wn in the follo wing illustration and described in T able 1-5. F ro nt and L eft-Side C ompone nts 325388-002.book Page 26 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â2 7 Ta b l e 1 - 5 Fr ont and Left-Side Components Item Component Function 1 PC Card slot Suppor ts an optional T ype I or T ype II 32-bit (CardBus) or 16-bit PC Card. 2 PC Card eject button Ejects an optional PC Card from the PC Card slot. 3 Optical drive Suppor ts an optical disc. 4 SD (Secure Digital) Memor y Card slot Suppor ts SD Cards and MultiMediaCards. 5 Microphone jac k Connects an op tional monaural or stereo microphone. 6 A udio line-out jac k Connects optional headphone or powe red stereo speake rs. Also connects the audio function of an audio/video de vice such as a tele vision or VCR. 7 Displa y release latch Opens the notebook. 8 Wireless de vice b utton T ur ns an optional internal wireless device on or off . 325388-002.book Page 27 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The notebook rear panel and right-side components are sho wn in the follo wing illustration and described in T able 1-6. R ear P a nel and R ight-Side C omponents Ta b l e 1 - 6 Rear P anel and Right-Side Components Item Component Function 1 Infrared por t Provides wireless comm unication between the notebook and an optional IrD A-compliant device . 2 P ow er connector Connect s an A C adapter cab le. 325388-002.book Page 28 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â29 3 Security cable slot Attaches an op tional security cable to the notebook. â The purpose of security solutions is to act as a deterrent. These solutions do not prevent the product from being mishandled or stolen. 4 V ents (2) Allow airflo w to cool inter nal components. Ã T o pre vent ov erheating, use the notebook only on hard surf aces which cannot obstruct the vents . Do not allow a soft surf ace, such as bedding, clothing, or a thick rug, to bloc k airflow . 5 Exter nal monitor connector Connects an optional V GA external monitor or projector . 6 S-Video connector Connects an optional S-Video de vice, such as a tele vision, VCR, camcorder , projector , or video capture card. 7 USB connectors (3) Connect optional 2.0-compliant USB de vices. 8 RJ-45 network jack Connects an Ethernet network cable. 9 RJ-11 telephone jack Connects a modem cable . 10 P arallel connector Connects an optional parallel de vice such as a printer . 11 1394 connector Connects an op tional 1394 de vice such as a camcorder or digital camera. Ta b l e 1 - 6 Rear P anel and Right-Side Components (Continued) Item Component Function 325388-002.book Page 29 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The notebook ke yboard components are shown in the follo wing illustration and described in T able 1-7. K e y boar d Com ponents 325388-002.book Page 30 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â31 Ta b l e 1 - 7 Ke yboard Components Item Component Function 1 F1 through F12 function keys P erf or m system and application tasks. When combined with the Fn key , th e function ke ys F1 and F3 through F12 perform additional tasks as hotk eys . 2 num lk ke y Enables n umeric lock and the internal ke ypad. 3 Inter nal k eypad Can be used li k e the ke ys on an external numeric ke ypad. 4 Cursor control ke ys Mov e th e cursor around the screen. 5 Applications key Displa ys a shor tcut menu f or items beneath the pointer . 6 Windows logo k ey Displa y the Windows Star t menu. 7 Fn k ey Ex ecutes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with another ke y . 325388-002.book Page 31 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The notebook top components are sho wn in the follo wing illustration and described in T able 1-8. T op C omponents Ta b l e 1 - 8 T op Components Item Component Function 1 Stereo speakers (2) Produce stereo sound. 2 P ow er button When the notebook is: â Off , press to tur n on the notebook. â On, briefly press to initiate Hiber nation. â In Standby , br iefly press to resume from Standby . â In Hiber nation, briefly press to restore from Hiber nation. 325388-002.book Page 32 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â33 3 Caps lock light On: Caps lock is on. 4 Num loc k light On: Num lock or the internal ke ypad is on. 5 Displa y lid switch â If the notebook is cl osed while on, tur ns off the displa y . â If the notebook is opened while in Standby , tur ns on the notebook (resumes from Standby). 6 V olume buttons (2) Increase or decrease system v olume. 7 Mute bu tton Mutes or restores v olume. 8 T ouchPad on/off bu tt o n Enables/disab les the T ouchP ad. 9 T ouchPad scroll zones (2) Scroll upward or do wnward. 10 Left and right T ouchP ad buttons Function like the left and right b uttons on an e xter nal mouse . 11 T ouchP ad Mov es the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. 12 T ouchP ad light On: T ouchP ad is enabled. Ta b l e 1 - 8 T op Components (Continued) Item Component Function 325388-002.book Page 33 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â3 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion The external components on the bottom of the notebook are sho wn in the follo wing illustration and described in T able 1-9. Bot tom Component s Ta b l e 1 - 9 Bottom Components Item Component Function 1 F an vent Allows airflo w to cool inter nal components. Ã T o prev ent ov erheating, do not obstruct the vent. Using the notebook on a soft surf ace, such as a pillow , blank et, rug, or thick clothing, ma y bloc k airflow . 2 R TC batter y compar tment Contains the R TC batter y . 325388-002.book Page 34 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Product D escr ipt ion Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 1â35 3 Docking connector Connects the notebook to an optional por t replicator . 4 Mini PCI compar tment Contain s the Mini PCI wireless card. 5 Hard dr iv e bay Holds the inter nal hard drive . 6 Batter y bay Holds the batter y pack. 7 Batter y pack release latch Releases a batter y pack from the batter y ba y . 8 Memor y expansion compar tment Contains one memor y slot f or an optional 128-, 256-, 512-, or 1024-MB memor y module. Ta b l e 1 - 9 Bottom Components (Continued) Item Component Function 325388-002.book Page 35 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
1â3 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Product D escr ipt ion 1. 6 D e s i g n O v e r v i e w This section presents a design ov erview of k ey parts and features of the notebook. Refer to Chapter 3, âIllustrated Parts Catalog, â to identify replacement parts, and Chapter 5, âRemo v al and Replacement Procedures, â for disassembly steps. The system board provides the follo wing device connections: â Memory expansion board â Hard dri ve â Display â K e yboard and T ouchPad â Audio â Mobile Intel Pentium 4 Processor -M processors â Fan â PC Card â Modem, NIC, and wireless de vices à CA UTION: T o pr operly v entilate the notebook , allow at leas t a 7 .6-cm (3-inc h) clear ance on the left and r ight si des of the not ebook . The notebook uses an electric fan for v e ntilation. The fan is controlled by a temperature sensor and is designed to turn on automatically when high temperature conditions exist. These conditions can be caused by high e xternal temperatures, heavy system po wer consumption, certain po wer management/battery conserv ation conf igurations, battery fast char ging, and some software applications. Exhaust air is displaced through the ventilation grill located on the left side of the notebook. 325388-002.book Page 36 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â1 2 T r oubl eshooting à W ARNI NG: Only author i z ed techni c ians tr ained by HP should r epair this equipment . All tr oubleshooting and r epair procedur es ar e detailed to allo w only su bass embl y/module lev el r epair . Because o f the comple x it y of the indi v idual boar ds and subasse mblies , do not at tempt to mak e repair s at the componen t lev el or modifi cations to an y pr inted w ir ing boar d. Im pr oper r epairs can c r eate a safety ha z ard . An y indicati on of component r eplacement or pr inted w iring boar d modif icati on may v oid an y war ranty or ex change allo wances . 2. 1 C omp uter Setu p and Di agnos tic s Utiliti es The notebook features two system management utilities: â Computer Setup âA system information and customization utility that can be used e ven when your operating system is not working or will not load. This utility includes settings that are not a v ailable in Microsoft ® Wi n d o w s ® . 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
2â2 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting â Diagnostics f or W indows âA system information and diagnostic utility that is used within the W indo ws operating system. Use this utility whene v er possible to: â Display system information. â T est system components. â T roubleshoot a de vice configuration problem in W indo ws XP Professional or W indo ws XP Home. â It is not necessary to conf ig ure a de vice connected to a USB connector on the notebook or to an optional port replicator . Using C ompu ter Setup Information and settings in Computer Setup are accessed from the File, Security , or Advanced menus: 1. T urn on or restart the notebook. Press F10 while the F10 = R OM-Based Setup message is displayed in the lo wer left corner of the screen. â T o change the language, press F2. â T o view na vigation information, press F1. â T o return to the Computer Setup menu, press esc. 2. Select the File, Security , or Adv anced menu. 3. T o close Computer Setup and restart the notebook: â Select File > Sa ve Changes and Exit and press enter . -or - â Select File > Ignore Changes and Exit and press enter . 4. When you are prompted to conf irm your action, press F10. 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â3 Selecti ng fr om the F ile Menu Ta b l e 2 - 1 File Menu Select T o Do This System Inf or mation â View identification inf or mation about the notebook, a por t replicator , and any batter y packs in the system. â View specification inf or mation about the processor , memor y and cache size , and system R OM. Sa ve to Flopp y Sa ve system config uration settings to a disk ette. Restore from Flopp y Restore system configuration settings from a diskette . Restore Def aults Replace configur ation settings in Computer Setup with f actor y def ault settings. Identification inf or mation is retained. Ignore Changes and Exit Cancel ch anges entered during the current session, then e xit and restar t the notebook. Sa ve Changes and Exit Sav e cha nges entered during the current session, then e xit and restar t the notebook. 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
2â4 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Selec ting from the Sec urity Menu Ta b l e 2 - 2 Security Menu Select T o Do This Administrator P ass word Enter , cha nge, or delete an administra tor pass word. P ow er-on P assw ord Enter , change, or delete a po wer-on pass word. DriveLoc k P ass words Enab le/disable DriveLoc k; change a Dr iv eLock User or Master pass word. â DriveLock Settings ar e accessible only when you enter Computer Setup by turning on (not restarting) the notebook. De vice Security Enab le/disable: â Po r t s â Disk ette write* â CD-ROM or disk ette star tup â Settings for a DVD-ROM can be entered in the CD-ROM field. System IDs Enter identificati on numbers f or the notebook, a por t replicator , and al l batter y pac ks in the system. 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â5 Selec ting from th e Ad v an ced Menu Ta b l e 2 - 3 Adv anced Menu Select T o Do This Language Change the Comp uter Setup language. Boot Options Enable/disable: â QuickBoot, which star ts the notebook more quic kly by eliminating some star tup tests. (If you suspect a memory fa ilure and want to test memor y automatically during star tup , disable Quic kBoot.) â MultiBoot, which sets a star tup sequence that can include most bootab le de vices and media in the system. De vice Options â Enable/disab le the embedded numeric ke ypad at star tup . â Enable/disab le multiple standard pointing de vices at star tup . (T o set the notebook to suppor t only a single, usually nonstandard, pointing de vice at star tup , select Disable .) â Enable/disab le USB legacy suppor t f or a USB ke yboard. (When USB legacy suppor t is enabled, the k eyboard works e v en when a Windows oper ating system is not loaded.) â Set an optional e xter nal monitor or ov erhead projector connected to a video card in a por t replicator as the primar y device . (When the notebook displa y is set as secondar y , the notebook must be shut do wn bef ore it is undock ed from a por t replicator .) 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
2â6 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting De vice Options (continued) â Change the parallel por t mode from Enhanced P arallel P or t (EPP , the def ault setting) to standard, bidirectional EPP , or Enhanced Capabilities P or t (ECP). â Set video-out mode to NTSC (def ault), P AL, NTSC-J , or P AL-M.* â Enable/disab le all settings in the SpeedStep ï window . (When Disable is selected, the notebook runs in Batter y Optimized mode .) â Specify how the notebook recogniz es multiple identical por t replicators that are identically equipped. Select Disable to recognize the por t replicators as a single por t replicator ; select Enable to recogniz e the por t replicators individually , by serial number . â Enable/disab le the repor ting of the processor serial number by the processor to the software . *Video modes v ar y e v en within regions. Ho we ver , NTSC is common in Nor th America; P AL, in Europe, Africa, and th e Middle East; NTSC-J, in J apan; and P AL-M, in Brazil. Other South and Ce ntral Amer ican regions can use NTSC , P AL, or P AL-M. Ta b l e 2 - 3 Adv anced Menu (Continued) Select T o Do This 325388-002.book Page 6 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â7 2.2 T r oub leshooting Flo wc h ar ts Ta b l e 2 - 4 T r oubleshooting Flowc harts Over view Flowc har t Description 2.1 Initial troubleshooting 2.2 No pow er , par t 1 2.3 No pow er , par t 2 2.4 No pow er , par t 3 2.5 No pow er , par t 4 2.6 No video , par t 1 2.7 No video , par t 2 2.8 Nonfunctioning por t replicator 2.9 No operating system (OS) loading 2.10 No OS loading from hard dr iv e, par t 1 2.11 No OS loading from hard dr iv e, par t 2 2.12 No OS loading from hard dr iv e, par t 3 2.13 No OS loading from CD- or D VD-RO M drive 2.14 No audio, part 1 2.15 No audio, part 2 2.16 Nonfunctioning device 2.17 Nonfunctioning keyboard 2.18 Nonfunctioning pointing device 2.19 No networ k or modem connection 325388-002.book Page 7 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
2â8 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc har t 2. 1âInitial T roubl eshooting Connecting to network or modem? Begin troubleshooting. Is there power? Is the OS loading? Is there video? (no boot) Is there sound? Beeps, LEDs, or error messages? Keyboard/ pointing device working? Go to Flowchart 2.17, Nonfunctioning Device. Go to Flowchart 2.2, No Power . Go to Flowchart 2.6, No Video. All drives working? Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N End N N N Go to Flowchart 2.9, No OS Loading. Go to Flowchart 2.15, No Audio. Go to Flowchart 2.18, Nonfunctioning Keyboard or Flowchart 2.19, Nonfunctioning Pointing Device. Check LED board, speaker connections. Go to Flowchart 2.20, No Network or Modem. 325388-002.book Page 8 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â9 Flo wc har t 2.2âNo P o wer , P art 1 1. Reseat the power cables in the port replicator and at the AC outlet. 2. Ensure that the AC power sour ce is active. 3. Ensure that the power strip is working. Done Remove from port replicator (if applicable). Power up on battery power? Power up on AC power? Power up in port replicator? Power up on battery power? Power up in port replicator? Done *Reset power . *Reset power . Power up on AC power? N Y Y N N Y N N Y Y YN 1. On some models, there is a separate reset button. 2. On some models, the notebook can be reset using the Standby switch and either the lid switch or the main power switch. *NOTES: Go to Flowchart 2.4, No Power , Part 3. Go to Flowchart 2.3, No Power , Part 2. Go to Flowchart 2.8, Nonfunctioning Port Replicator . No power (power LED is off). 325388-002.book Page 9 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
2â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc h art 2.3âNo P o w er , P ar t 2 Continued from Flowchart 2.2, No Power , Part 1. Visually check for debris in battery socket and clean if necessary . Done N Y Power on? Check battery by recharging it, moving it to another notebook, or replacing it. Power on? Done Y Replace power supply (if applicable). N Power on? Done Y N Go to Flowchart 2.4, No Power , Part 3. 325388-002.book Page 10 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â11 Flo wc har t 2.4âNo P o wer , P art 3 Continued from Flowchart 2.3, No Power , Part 2. Reseat AC adapter in notebook and at power sour ce. Internal or external AC adapter? Done Done Done Done Power on? Power on? Power on? Plug directly into AC outlet. Power LED on? Power outlet active? T r y different outlet. Replace external AC adapter . Replace power cord. Y N Y Y Y Y N N N N External Internal Go to Flowchart 2.5, No Power , Part 4. 325388-002.book Page 11 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
2â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc h art 2.5âNo P o w er , P ar t 4 Y N Continued from Flowchart 2.4, No Power , Part 3. Reseat loose components and boards, and replace damaged items. Open notebook. Loose or damaged parts? Y Close notebook and retest. Power on? Done N Replace the following items (if applicable) in the order given. Check notebook operation after each of the two following replacement steps: 1. Internal DC-DC converter , processor , and system board* 2. Internal AC adapter * NOTE: Replace these items as a set to prevent shorting out among components. 325388-002.book Page 12 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â13 Flo wc har t 2.6âNo Video, P art 1 A N Stand-alone or port replicator? No video. Replace the following one at a time. T est after each replacement. 1. Cable between notebook and notebook display (if applicable) 2. Inverter board (if applicable) 3. Display 4. VGA board Internal or external display*? Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Port Replicator Internal Stand-alone External Adjust brightness. Video OK? Done Y Press lid switch to ensure operation. Video OK? Done Y N Video OK? Done Done N Check for bent pins on cable. Tr y another display . Internal and external video OK? Replace system board. YY N N * NOTE: T o change from internal to external display , use the hotkey combination. Y Go to Flowchart 2.7, No Video, Part 2. 5. System board 325388-002.book Page 13 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
2â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc har t 2.7âNo Video, P art 2 Y N Continued from Flowchart 2.6, No Video, Part 1. Done Adjust external monitor display . Video OK? Adjust display brightness. Video OK? Video OK? Done Done Check that notebook is properly seated in port replicator , for bent pins on cable, and for monitor connection. Go to âAâ in Flowchart 2.6, No Video, Part 1. Check brightness of external monitor . T r y another external monitor . Internal and external video OK? Go to Flowchart 2.8, Nonfunctioning Port Replicator . Y Y Y N N N Remove notebook from port replicator , if connected. 325388-002.book Page 14 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â15 Flo wc har t 2.8âNonfunc tioning P or t Replicator (i f applic able) Y N Reseat power cord in port replicator and power outlet. N Replace the following port replicator components one at a time. Check notebook operation after each replacement. 1. Power supply 2. I/O board 3. Backplane board 4. Switch box 5. Port replicator motor mechanism Check voltage setting on port replicator . Reset monitor cable connector at port replicator . Reinstall notebook into port replicator . Port replicator operating? Port replicator operating? Remove notebook, reseat all internal parts, and replace any damaged items in port replicator . Done Done Y Nonfunctioning port replicator . 325388-002.book Page 15 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
2â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc har t 2.9âNo O perating Sy stem (OS) Loa ding No OS loading from hard drive, go to Flowchart 2.10, No OS Loading, Hard Drive, Part 1. Reseat power cord in port replicator and power outlet. No OS loading.* * NOTE: Before beginning troubleshooting, always check cable connections, cable ends, and drives for bent or damaged pins. No OS loading from diskette drive, go to Flowchart 2.13, No OS Loading, Diskette Drive. No OS loading from CD- or DVD-ROM drive, go to Flowchart 2.14, No OS Loading, CD- or DVD-ROM Drive. No OS loading from network, go to Flowchart 2.20, No Network/Modem Connection. 325388-002.book Page 16 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â17 Flo wc har t 2. 1 0âNo OS Loadin g , Hard Driv e, P ar t 1 Go to Flowchart 2.17, Nonfunctioning Device. Done OS not loading from hard drive. Nonsystem disk message? Go to Flowchart 2.11, No OS Loading from Hard Drive, Part 2. Reseat external hard drive. OS loading? Done Boot from CD? Boot from hard drive? Y Y Y Y N N N N Check the Setup utility for correct booting order . 325388-002.book Page 17 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
2â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc har t 2. 1 1âNo OS Loadin g, H ard Driv e, P art 2 Continued from Flowchart 2.10, No OS Loading from Hard Drive, Part 1. Reseat hard drive. Done CD or diskette in drive? 1. Replace hard drive. 2. Replace system board. Go to Flowchart 2.13, No OS Loading from Diskette Drive. Load OS using System Restore CD (if applicable). Format hard drive and bring to a bootable C:\ prompt. Create partition, then format hard drive to bootable C:\ prompt. Boot from diskette drive? Remove diskette and reboot. Y N Boot from hard drive? Y N Y N Hard drive accessible? Y N Hard drive accessible? Done Run FDISK. Y N Hard drive partitioned? Hard drive formatted? Y N Y N Notebook booted? Done Y N Go to Flowchart 2.12, No OS Loading from Hard Drive, Part 3. Go to Flowchart 2.12, No OS Loading from Hard Drive, Part 3. 325388-002.book Page 18 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â19 Flo wc har t 2. 1 2âN o OS Loadin g, H ard Driv e, P ar t 3 Y System files on hard drive? Continued from Flowchart 2.11, No OS Loading from Hard Drive, Part 2. Clean virus. Done N Install OS and reboot. Virus on hard drive? OS loading from hard drive? Y N Y N Y N Diagnostics on diskette? Replace hard drive. Run diagnostics and follow recommendations. Run SCANDISK and check for bad sectors. Can bad sectors be fixed? Replace hard drive. Y N Y N Fix bad sectors. Boot from hard drive? Replace hard drive. Done 325388-002.book Page 19 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
2â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc har t 2. 1 3âNo OS Loa ding , CD- or D VD-ROM Driv e Y Done N Bootable disc in drive? Disc in drive? No OS loading from CD- or DVD-ROM Drive. Install bootable disc and reboot notebook. Go to Flowchart 2.17, Nonfunctioning Device. Go to Flowchart 2.17, Nonfunctioning Device. Install bootable disc. Boots from CD or DVD? Boots from CD or DVD? T r y another bootable disc. Booting from another device? Booting order correct? Correct boot order using the Setup utility . Done Reseat drive. Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N Clear CMOS. Refer to Section 1.2, âClearing a Password,â for instructions. 325388-002.book Page 20 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â21 Flo wc har t 2. 1 4âNo Audio, P art 1 No audio. N Notebook in port replicator (if applicable)? Internal audio? Audio? Done Undock Audio? Done T urn up audio internally or externally . Go to Flowchart 2.16, No Audio, Part 2. Go to Flowchart 2.16, No Audio, Part 2. Go to Flowchart 2.17, Nonfunctioning Device. Replace the following port replicator components one at a time, as applicable. Check audio status after each change. 1. Replace port replicator audio cable. 2. Replace audio cable. 3. Replace speaker . 4. Replace port replicator audio board. 5. Replace backplane board. 6. Replace I/O board. Y Y Y Y N N N 325388-002.book Page 21 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
2â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc har t 2. 1 5âNo Audio, P ar t 2 YN Continued from Flowchart 2.15, No Audio, Part 1. Reload audio drivers. Audio driver in OS configured? Audio? Y Y Y N N N Correct drivers for application? Connect to external speaker . Load drivers and set configuration in OS. Audio? Done Replace audio board and speaker connections in notebook (if applicable). 1. Replace internal speakers. 2. Replace audio board (if applicable). 3. Replace system board. 325388-002.book Page 22 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â2 3 Flo wc har t 2. 1 6âNonfunc tionin g De vice Done Any physical device detected? Y N Unplug the nonfunctioning device from the notebook and inspect cables and plugs for bent or broken pins or other damage. Reseat device. Clear CMOS. Done Fix or replace broken item. Nonfunctioning device. Reattach device. Close notebook, plug in power , and reboot. Device boots properly? Go to Flowchart 2.9, No OS Loading. Device boots properly? Replace hard drive. Replace NIC. If integrated NIC, replace system board. Y N Y N 325388-002.book Page 23 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
2â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc har t 2. 1 7âNonfunc tionin g K e yboard Y N OK? Keyboard not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect notebook to good external keyboard. Reseat internal keyboard connector (if applicable). Replace internal keyboard or cable. OK? Y N Y N Done Done 325388-002.book Page 24 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
T r oubleshooting Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 2â2 5 Flo wc har t 2. 1 8âNonfunc tionin g P ointing De vice Y N OK? Pointing device not operating properly . External device works? Replace system board. Replace system board. Connect notebook to good external pointing device. Reseat internal pointing device connector (if applicable). Replace internal pointing device or cable. OK? Y N Y N Done Done 325388-002.book Page 25 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
2â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de T r oubleshooting Flo wc har t 2. 1 9âN o Net w ork/Modem C onnec tion Y Disconnect all power from the notebook and open. No network or modem connection. N Done Digital line? Network or modem jack active? Replace jack or have jack activated. Connect to nondigital line. NIC/modem configured in OS? Reload drivers and reconfigure. Reseat NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace NIC/modem (if applicable). Replace system board. OK? OK? Done N N N N Y Y Y Y 325388-002.book Page 26 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â1 3 I llus trated P ar ts C a tal og This chapter provides an illustrated parts breakdo wn and a reference for spare part numbers and option part numbers. 3. 1 Seri al N umber Location When ordering parts or requesting information, provide the notebook serial number and model number located on the bottom of the notebook. Ser ial Number L ocation 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
3â2 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Cat alog 3.2 Notebook M ajor Com ponen ts Noteboo k Major Components 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â3 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Notebook Major Components Item Description Spare P art Number 1 Displa y assemblies With carbonite and platinum b lue finish f o r use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks 15.4-inch, WUXGA 15.4-inch, WSXGA 15.4-inch, WXGA 350084-001 350127-001 350126-001 With carbon finish f or use with HP Compaq nx7000 notebooks 15.4-inch, WUXGA 15.4-inch, WSXGA 15.4-inch, WXGA 337006-001 337003-001 337008-001 With silv er finish f or use with Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks 15.4-inch, WUXGA 15.4-inch, WSXGA 15.4-inch, WXGA 337005-001 337004-001 337007-001 1a Displa y in ver ter (includes f our displa y rubber scre w cov ers) 336994-001 Miscellaneous Plastics Kits Contains par ts with carbonite and platinum blue finish f or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks 350130-001 Contains par ts with carbon finish for use with HP Compaq nx7000 notebooks 338133-001 Contains par ts with silver finish f or use with Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks 337009-001 2a 2b 2c 2d 2e 2f Include: Switch cov er PC Card slot space sav er Docking connector co ver Hard drive shield Hard drive connector Hard drive cov er Notebook f eet (not illustrated) 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
3â4 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Cat alog Noteboo k Major Components 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â5 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Notebook Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P art Number 3 K eyboar ds Asia P acific A ustralia Belgium Denmark Fr a n c e Ger many Greece Hong K ong Inter national Italy Ko r e a Latin America 337016-371 337016-011 337016-181 337016-081 337016-051 337016-041 337016-151 337016-AC1 337016-B31 337016-061 337016-AD1 337016-161 The Netherlands Norwa y P eopleâ s Republic of China P or tugal Saudi Arabia Spain Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand United Kingdom United States 337016-331 337016-091 337016-AA1 337016-131 337016-171 337016-071 337016-111 337016-AB1 337016-281 337016-031 337016-001 4 Speaker co vers with cab le F or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks F or use with HP Compaq nx7000 and Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks 350122-001 336973-001 5 T op cover s (include T ouchP ad and T ouchPad shield) F or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks F or use with HP Compaq nx7000 and Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks 350123-001 336983-001 Bluetooth wireless communications boar d (not illustrated) 338134-001 Miscellaneous Cable Kit , includes 336973-001 6a 6b 6c Speaker co ver cab le SD Card slot board cab le Modem board cable 7 Optical drives 24X Max D VD-ROM/CD-R W combination drive 8X Max D V D-R OM drive 24X Max CD-ROM driv e 336987-001 336986-001 336985-001 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
3â6 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Cat alog Noteboo k Major Components 325388-002.book Page 6 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â7 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Notebook Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P ar t Number 8 V GA boar d shield (includes ther mal pads) 337013-001 9 V GA boar ds (include ther mal pads) F or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks A TI MOBILITY RADEON 9200 with 64-MB video memor y A TI MOBILITY RADEON 9200 with 32-MB video memor y 350129-001 350128-001 F or use with HP Compaq nx7000 and Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks A TI MOBILITY RADEON 9200 with 64-MB video memor y A TI MOBILITY RADEON 9200 with 32-MB video memor y A TI MOBILITY RADEON 7500c with 32-MB video memor y 336970-001 336969-001 336968-001 10 System boar d (includes ther mal pads) PC Card assemb ly (not illustr ated) 336964-001 337014-001 11 Pr ocessors (include ther mal pads) Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.7-GHz Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.6-GHz Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.5-GHz Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.4-GHz Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.3-GHz 345566-001 337011-001 337023-001 337024-001 337010-001 12 Base enc losure (includes infrared lens) Left and right wireless antennae with cables (not illustrated) Left and right speakers (not illustr ated) 336960-001 336959-001 337015-001 13 Heat sink with fan Thermal pad (not illustrated) 337000-001 337001-001 14 Fan 336993-001 15 SD Car d slot board with cab le 336963-001 325388-002.book Page 7 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
3â8 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Cat alog Noteboo k Major Components 325388-002.book Page 8 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â9 Ta b l e 3 - 1 Spare P ar ts: Notebook Major Components (Continued) Item Description Spare P ar t Number Miscellaneous Doors/Co vers Kit , includes: 336984-001 16a 16b 16c 16d R TC batter y R TC batter y cov er Mini PCI compar tment cov er Memor y e xpansion compar tment cov er 17 Mini PCI comm unications boards Mini PCI 802.11b wireless LAN (RO W) Mini PCI 802.11b wireless LAN (MO W) Mini PCI 802.11 g wireless LAN 336976-001 336977-001 350083-001 18 Memory expansion boar ds 1024 MB DDR 512 MB DDR 256 MB DDR 128 MB DDR 339099-001 336998-001 336997-001 336996-001 19 Har d drives (hard dr iv e cov er , shield, and connector included with hard drive and in Miscellaneous Plastics Kits) 80-GB (5400-r pm) 80-GB (4200-r pm) 60-GB (5400-r pm) 60-GB (4200-r pm) 40-GB (4200-r pm) 30-GB (4200-r pm) 350082-001 336992-001 336991-001 336990-001 336989-001 350081-001 20 Modem boar d with cable 336999-001 21 Battery pack, 8-cell, 4.4-wH 336962-001 325388-002.book Page 9 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
3â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Cat alog 3. 3 M iscellan eous P l as tic s Ki t Comp one nts Miscel lane ous P l astics Kit Components 325388-002.book Page 10 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â11 T able 3-2 Miscellaneous Plastics Kit Components Spare P ar t Number 350130-001 (contains par ts with carbonite and platinum b lue finish for use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks) Spare P ar t Number 338133-001 (contains par ts with carbon finish f or use with HP Compaq nx7000 notebooks) Spare P ar t Number 337009-001 (contains par ts with silver finish f or use with Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks) Item Description 1S w i t c h c o v e r 2 PC Card slot space sa ver 3 Docking connector co ver 4 Notebook f eet (7) 5 Hard drive co ver 6 Hard drive shield 7 Hard drive connector 325388-002.book Page 11 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
3â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Cat alog 3.4 M iscellan eous C ab le Kit Comp one nts Misce llaneous C able K it Components Ta b l e 3 - 3 Miscellaneous Cable Kit Components Spare P ar t Number 336973-001 Item Description 1 SD Card slot board cable 2 Speaker co v er cable 3 Modem cable 325388-002.book Page 12 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â13 3.5 M iscell aneous Doors/Co v ers Kit Comp one nts Misc el la ne ous D oo rs/ Cov ers Kit Comp on ent s Ta b l e 3 - 4 Miscellaneous Doors/Co vers Kit Components Spare P ar t Number 336984-001 Item Description 1 R TC batter y 2 R TC batter y cov er 3 Memor y e xpansion compar tment cov er 4 Mini PCI compar tment cov er 325388-002.book Page 13 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
3â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Cat alog 3.6 M a s s St o ra g e D e vi ce s Mass S tor age Dev ice s T able 3-5 Mass Storage De vices Spare P ar t Number Information Item Description Spare P ar t Number 1 Optical drives 24X Max D VD-ROM/CD-R W combination drive 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 24X Max CD-ROM driv e D VD RW drive 336987-001 336986-001 336985-001 345588-001 2 Har d drives (include hard drive bez el and frame) 80-GB (5400-r pm) 80-GB (4200-r pm) 60-GB (5400-r pm) 60-GB (4200-r pm) 40-GB (4200-r pm) 30-GB (4200-r pm) 350082-001 336992-001 336991-001 336990-001 336989-001 350081-001 USB diskette drive (not illustrated) 336988-001 325388-002.book Page 14 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Illustr ated P arts Catalog Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 3â15 3.7 M iscellan eous Ta b l e 3 - 6 Miscellaneous (not illustrated) Spare P ar t Information Description Spare P art Number AC a d a p t e r 338136-001 Logo Kits F or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks F or use with HP Compaq nx7000 notebooks F or use with Compaq Pr esario X1000 notebooks 350125-001 336995-001 338135-001 Po w e r c o r d s F or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks Asia P acific A ustralia Belgium Denmark Europe Fr a n c e Ger many Greece Hong K ong Italy Ko r e a Latin America The Netherlands 350055-371 350055-011 350055-181 350055-081 350055-021 350055-051 350055-041 350055-151 350055-AC1 350055-061 350055-AD1 350055-161 350055-331 Norwa y Pe o p l e âs Republic of China P or tugal Saudi Arabia Spain Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand United Kingdom United States 350055-091 350055-AA1 350055-131 350055-171 350055-071 350055-111 350055-AB1 350055-281 350055-031 350055-001 325388-002.book Page 15 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
3â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Illustr ated P arts Cat alog Po w e r c o r d s F or use with HP Compaq nx7000 an d Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks A ustralia Denmark Europe/Middle East/Africa Italy 246959-011 246959-081 246959-021 246959-061 Jap a n Ko r e a Switzerland United Kingdom United States 246959-291 246959-AD1 246959-A G1 246959-031 246959-001 Screw Kit (includes the f ollowing scre ws; ref er to Appendix C , âScrew Listing, â for more inf or mation on screw specifications and usage . ) 337012-001 â Phillips M2.5Ã15.0 scre w â Phillips M2.5Ã7.0 screw â Phillips M2.5Ã5.0 screw â Spring-loaded Phillips M2.0Ã9.0 screw â Phillips M2.5Ã3.5 scre w â Phillips M2.5Ã3.0 scre w â Phillips M2.0Ã3.0 scre w Ta b l e 3 - 6 Miscellaneous (not illustrated) Spare P ar t Information (Continued) Description Spare P art Number 325388-002.book Page 16 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â1 4 Remo v a l and Repl a cemen t Preliminaries This chapter provides essential information for proper and safe remov al and replacement service. 4. 1 T ools Required Y ou will need the follo wing tools to complete the remov al and replacement procedures: â Magnetic scre wdriv er â Phillips P0 scre wdri v er â 5.0-mm socket for system board standof fs â Flat-bladed scre wdriv er â T ool kit (includes connector remov al tool, loopback plugs, and case utility tool) 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
4â2 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s 4.2 S er vice C onsidera tions The follo wing sections include some of the considerations that you should keep in mind during disassembly and assembly procedures. â As you remov e each subassem bly from the notebook, place the subassembly (and all accompanying scre ws) aw ay from the work area to pre vent damage. Pl a s t i c Pa r t s Using excessi ve force during disassembly and reassembly can damage plastic parts. Use care when handling the plastic parts. Apply pressure only at the points designated in the maintenance instructions. Ca bl es and C onnec tors à CA UTION: When ser vicing the notebook , ensure that cables are placed in their proper locations during the reassembly process . Improper cable placement can damage the notebook. Cables must be handled with extreme care to a void damage. Apply only the tension required to unseat or seat the cables during remov al and insertion. Handle cables by the connector whene ver possible. In all cases, a void bending, twisting, or tearing cables. Ensure that cables are routed in such a way that they cannot be caught or snagged b y parts being remove d or replaced. Handle flex cables w ith e xtreme care; these cables tear easily . 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminari es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â3 4. 3 Pr e v e nti ng Damage to R emo v able D ri v es Remov able dri ves are fragile components that must be handled with care. T o prev ent damage to the notebook, damage to a remov able dri ve, or loss of information, observ e the follo wing precautions: â Before removing or inserting a hard dri ve, shut do wn the notebook. If you are unsure whether the notebook is of f or in Hibernation, turn the notebook on, then shut it do wn. â Before removing a disk ette dri v e or optical dri ve, ensure that a diskette or disc is not in the dri ve. Ensure that the optical dri v e tray is closed. â Before handling a dri ve, ensure that you are discharged of static electricity . While handling a dri ve, a void touching the connector . â Handle dri v es on surfaces that ha ve at least one inch of shock-proof foam. â A v oid dropping dri ves from an y height onto any surface. â After removing a hard dri ve, CD-R OM dri ve, or a diskette dri v e, place it in a static-proof bag. â A v oid exposing a hard dri ve to products that ha ve magnetic f ields, such as monitors or speakers. â A v oid exposing a dri ve to temperature e xtremes or liquids. â If a dri ve must be mailed, place the dri ve in a b ubble pack mailer or other suitable form of protecti v e packaging and label the package, âFragile: Handle W ith Care. â 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
4â4 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s 4.4 Pre v enting El ec trostati c Dam ag e Many electronic components are sensiti ve to electrostatic dischar ge (ESD). Circuitry design and structure determine the degree of sensiti vity . Networks b uilt into man y integrated circuits provide some protection, b ut in many cases, the dischar ge contains enough po wer to alter de vi ce parameters or melt silicon junctions. A sudden dischar ge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor can destroy static-sensiti ve de vices or microcircuitry . Often the spark is neither felt nor heard, b ut damage occurs. An electronic de vice exposed to electrostatic discharge might not be af fected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. Or the de vice might function normally for a while, then degrade in the internal layers, reducing its life e xpectancy . 4.5 P ac k agin g and T ranspor ting Precautions Use the follo wing grounding precautions when packaging and transporting equipment: â T o av oid hand contact, transport products in static-safe containers, such as tubes, bags, or boxes. â Protect all electrostatic-sensiti ve parts and assemblies with conducti ve or appro ved containers or packaging. â K eep electrostatic-sensiti ve parts in their containers until the parts arri v e at static-free workstations. â Place items on a grounded surface before remo ving items from their containers. â Alw ays be properly grounded when touching a sensiti ve component or assembly . 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminari es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â5 â Store reusable electrostatic-sensiti v e parts from assemblies in protecti v e packaging or nonconducti ve foam. â Use transporters and con ve yors made of antistatic belts and roller b ushings. Ensure that mechanized equipment used for moving materials is wired to ground and that proper materials are selected to a v oid static charging. When grounding is not possible, use an ionizer to dissipate electric char ges. 4.6 W or ksta tion Precau tions Use the follo wing grounding precautions at workstations: â Cov er the workstation with approv ed static-shielding material (refer to T able 4-2). â Use a wrist strap connected to a properly grounded work surface and use properly grounded tools and equipment. â Use conducti ve f ield service tools, such as cutters, scre wdriv ers, and v acuums. â When using f ixtures that must directly contact dissipati ve surfaces, only use f ixtures made of static-safe materials. â K eep the work area free of nonconducti ve materials, such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam. â Handle electrostatic-sensiti v e components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCM laminate. Handle these items only at static-free workstations. â A v oid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry . â T urn of f power and input signals before inserting or remo ving connectors or test equipment. 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
4â6 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr eliminar ie s 4.7 G roundin g Eq uipm ent an d Methods Grounding equipment must include either a wrist strap or a foot strap at a grounded workstation. â When seated, wear a wrist strap connected to a grounded system. Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of one megohm ±10% resistance in the ground cords. T o provide proper ground, wear a strap snugly against the skin at all times. On grounded mats with banana-plug connectors, use alligator clips to connect a wrist strap. â When standing, use foot stra ps and a grounded floor mat. Foot straps (heel, toe, or boot straps) can be used at standing workstations and are compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conducti ve floors or dissipati ve floor mats, use foot straps on both feet with a minimum of one megohm resistance between the operator and ground. T o be effecti ve, the conducti ve strips must be w orn in contact with the skin. Other grounding equipment recommended for use in pre v enting electrostatic damage includes: â Antistatic tape â Antistatic smocks, aprons, and slee ve protectors â Conducti v e bins and other assembly or soldering aids â Nonconducti v e foam â Conducti v e tabletop workstations with ground cords of one megohm resistance â Static-dissipati ve tables or floor mats with hard ties to the ground â Field service kits â Static aw areness labels â Material-handling packages â Nonconducti v e plastic bags, tubes, or boxes 325388-002.book Page 6 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
R emo val and R eplacement Pr eliminari es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 4â7 â Metal tote boxes â Electrostatic v oltage le vels and protecti ve materials T able 4-1 shows ho w humidity affects the electrostatic v oltage le vels generated by dif ferent activities. T able 4-2 lists the shielding protection provided by antistatic bags and floor mats. Ta b l e 4 - 1 T ypical Electrostatic V oltage Levels Relative Humidity Event 10% 40% 55% W alking across car pet 35,000 V 15,000 V 7,500 V W alking across vinyl floor 12,000 V 5,000 V 3,000 V Motions of bench worker 6,000 V 800 V 400 V Removing DIPS from plastic tube 2,000 V 700 V 400 V Removing DIPS from vin yl tra y 11,500 V 4,000 V 2,000 V Removing DIPS from Styrof oam 14,500 V 5,000 V 3,500 V Removing b ubble pac k from PCB 26,500 V 20,000 V 7,000 V P acking PCBs in f oam-lined box 21,000 V 11,000 V 5,000 V â A product can be degraded by as little as 700 V. Ta b l e 4 - 2 Static-Shielding Materials Material Use V oltage Protection Le vel Antistatic plastic Bags 1,500 V Carbon-loaded plastic Floor mats 7,500 V Metallized laminate Floor mats 5,000 V 325388-002.book Page 7 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â1 5 Remo v a l and Repl a cemen t Pr ocedure s This chapter provides remo val and replacement procedures. There are 50 Phillips scre ws, in nine dif ferent sizes, that must be remov ed, replaced, and/or loosened when servicing the notebook. Make special note of each scre w size and location during remov al and replacement. Refer to Appendix C, âScre w Li sting, â for detailed information on scre w sizes, locations, and usage. 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
5â2 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 1 S e r i a l N u m b e r Report the notebook serial number to HP when requesting information or ordering spare parts. The serial number is located on the bottom of the notebook. Ser ial Number L ocation 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â3 5 .2 Di sassembl y Seque nce Chart Use the follo wing chart to determine the section number to be referenced when removing notebook components. Disassembl y Sequence Chart Section Description # of Screws Remo ved 5.3 Preparing the notebook for disassemb l y Batter y pack 0 Hard drive 2 Hard drive co ver and shield 4 5.4 Notebook f eet 0 5.5 Memor y e xpansion board 1 5.6 Mini PCI communications board 1 5.7 R TC batter y 0 5.8 Optical drive 1 5.9 K eyboard 2 5.10 Switch cov er 0 5.11 Speake r cov er 4 5.12 F an 1 5.13 Heat sink 4 5.14 Processor 0 5.15 Displa y assembly 7 5.16 T op cov er 16 5.17 Bluetooth board 2 5.18 SD Card slot board and cable 2 5.19 V GA board and shield 2 5.20 Modem board and cable 0 5.21 System board 1 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
5â4 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 .3 Preparing t h e Notebook for Di sassem bl y Before you begin an y remov al or installation procedures: 1. Sa ve your w ork, exit all applications, and shut do wn the notebook. If you are not sure whet her the notebook is of f or in Hibernation, briefly press the po wer b utton. If your work returns to the screen, sa ve your w ork, exit all applications, and then shut do wn the notebook. 2. Disconnect all external de vices connected to the notebook. 3. Disconnect the po wer cord. 4. Remov e the battery pack by follo wing these steps: a. T urn the notebook upside do wn, with the rear panel facing you. Spare P ar t Number Information Batter y pack, 8-cell, 4.4-wH 336962-001 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â5 b . Slide and hold 1 the battery release latch to the right. The front edge of the battery pack releases from the notebook. c. Lift the front edge of the battery pack up and swing it back 2 . R emo ving the Battery P ack d. Remov e the battery pack. Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the battery pack. 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
5â6 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. Remov e the hard driv e by follo wing these steps: a. T urn the notebook upside do wn, with the front facing you. b . Remove the tw o PM2.5Ã9.5 scre ws 1 that secure the hard dri ve to the notebook. c. Use the notch 2 on the hard dri ve co ver to lift the rear edge of the hard dri v e up and swing it forward 3 . R emo ving the Har d Dri ve d. Remov e the hard driv e. Spare P ar t Number Information Hard drives (hard driv e cov er , sh ield, and connecto r included with hard drive and in Misc ellaneous Plastics Kits) 80-GB (5400-r pm) 80-GB (4200-r pm) 60-GB (5400-r pm) 60-GB (4200-r pm) 40-GB (4200-r pm) 30-GB (4200-r pm) 350082-001 336992-001 336991-001 336990-001 336989-001 350081-001 325388-002.book Page 6 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â7 Ã CA UTION: The har d dri ve co ver should be r emov ed only if it is damaged and mus t be r eplaced . Unneces sar ily r emov ing the cov er can r esult in damage to the co ver and har d dr i ve and lo ss o f infor mation . e. Remov e the four PM2.5Ã3.5 screws 1 that secure the hard dri ve to the hard dri ve co ver and shield. f. Remove the hard dri ve shield 2 and connector 3 from the hard dri ve. g. Separate the hard dri v e from the hard dri ve co ve r 4 . R emo ving the Har d Dri ve f r om the H ar d Dri ve C o v er â The hard dri ve co ver , shield, and connector are included with the hard dri ve and also in the Miscellaneous Plastics Kits, spare part number 350130-001 for HP Pa vilion zt3000 models, spare part number 338133-001 for HP Compaq nx7000 models, and spare part number 337009-001 for Compaq Presario X1000 models. Re verse the abo ve procedure to install the hard dri ve. 325388-002.book Page 7 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
5â8 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 .4 Notebook F eet The notebook feet are adhesi ve-backed rubber pads, and are included in the Miscellaneous Plastics Kits, spare part number 350130-001 for HP Pa vilion zt3000 models, spare part number 338133-001 for HP Compaq nx7000 models, and spare part number 337009-001 for Compaq Presario X1000 models. The notebook feet attach to the base enclosure as indicated in the follo wing illustration. R eplac ing the Notebook F eet 325388-002.book Page 8 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â9 5 .5 Memor y Expansion B oard 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. T urn the notebook upside do wn, with the front facing you. 3. Loosen the PM2.5Ã5.0 scre w 1 that secures the memory expansion compartment co ver to the notebook. 4. Lift the front edge of the cov er up 2 and swing it back. R emo v ing the Memor y Expansion C ompartment Co ver 5. Remov e the cov er . â The memory expansion compartment co ver is included in the Miscellaneous Doors/Cov ers Kit, spare part number 336984-001. Spare P ar t Number Information 1024-MB DDR memor y e xpansion board 512-MB DDR memor y e xpansion board 256-MB DDR memor y e xpansion board 128-MB DDR memor y e xpansion board 336909-001 336998-001 336997-001 336996-001 325388-002.book Page 9 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
5â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. Spread the retaining tabs 1 that secure the memory expansion board to the sock et. The board rises up at a 45-degree angle. 7. Pull the board aw ay from the socket at a 45-de gree angle 2 . R emo v ing the Memor y Expansion Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a memory e xpansion board. 325388-002.book Page 10 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â11 5 .6 Mini PCI Communica tions Board 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. T urn the notebook upside do wn, with the front facing you. 3. Loosen the PM2.5Ã5.0 scre w 1 that secures the Mini PCI compartment cov er to the notebook. 4. Lift the rear edge of the cov er up 2 and swing it forward. R emo ving the Mini P CI Compartment C ov er 5. Remov e the cov er . â The Mini PCI compartment cov er is included in the Miscellaneous Doors/Cov ers Kit, spare part number 336984-001. Spare P ar t Number Information Mini PCI 802.11b wireless LAN (R O W) Mini PCI 802.11b wireless LAN (MO W) Mini PCI 802.11g wireless LAN 336976-001 336977-001 350083-001 325388-002.book Page 11 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. Disconnect the two antenna cables from the terminals on the Mini PCI communications board 1 . Note that the longer of the two cables should be connected to the left antenna terminal (marked â A UXâ) and the shorter cable should be connected to the right terminal (marked âMAINâ). 7. Spread the retaining tabs 2 that secure the memory expansion board to the sock et. The board rises up at a 45-degree angle. 8. Pull the board aw ay from the socket at a 45-de gree angle 3 . R emo ving the Mi ni PCI C ommunicati ons Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedure to install a Mini PCI communications board. 325388-002.book Page 12 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â13 5. 7 R TC B a t t e r y â The R TC battery and R TC battery co ver are included in the Miscellaneous Doors/Cov ers Kit, spare part number 336984-001. 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. T urn the notebook upside do wn, with the front facing you. 3. Insert a flat-bladed tool into the notch 1 on the front edge of the R TC battery cov er and separate the front edge of the cov er from the notebook. 4. Remov e the R TC battery from the socket on the system board 2 . R emo ving the R T C batter y Re v erse the abov e procedure to install an R TC battery . 325388-002.book Page 13 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 .8 Optical Driv e 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. T urn the notebook upside do wn, with the front facing you. 3. Remov e the PM2.5Ã9.5 screw 1 that secures the optical dri v e to the notebook. 4. Insert a slender tool into the slot in the hard dri ve bay and push to the right to disengage the optical dri ve from the notebook 2 . R emo ving the Opti cal Dr i ve 5. Remov e the optical driv e. Re v erse the abov e procedure to install an optical dri ve. Spare P ar t Number Information 24X Max D VD-ROM/CD-R W combination dr ive 8X Max D VD-ROM drive 24X Max CD-ROM driv e 336987-001 336986-001 336985-001 325388-002.book Page 14 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â15 5. 9 Ke y b o a r d 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. T urn the notebook upside do wn, with the front facing you. 3. Remov e the two PM2.5Ã15.0 scre ws that secure the ke yboard to the base enclosure. R emo ving the K e yboar d Scr e w s Spare P ar t Number Information Asia P acific A ustralia Belgium Denmark Fr a n c e Ger many Greece Hong K ong Inter national Italy Ko r e a Latin America 337016-371 337016-011 337016-181 337016-081 337016-051 337016-041 337016-151 337016-AC1 337016-B31 337016-061 337016-AD1 337016-161 The Netherlands Norwa y P eopleâ s Republic of China P or tugal Saudi Arabia Spain Switzerland Ta i w a n Thailand United Kingdom United States 337016-331 337016-091 337016-AA1 337016-131 337016-171 337016-071 337016-111 337016-AB1 337016-281 337016-031 337016-001 325388-002.book Page 15 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 4. T urn the notebook right-side up with the front facing you. 5. Open the notebook. 6. Slide the four notches on the top edge of the ke yboard to ward you. R eleasing the K e yboar d 325388-002.book Page 16 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â17 7. Lift the rear edge of the ke yboard, swing it up and forward 1 , and rest it on the top cov er . 8. Release the ZIF connector 2 to which the ke yboard cable is attached and disconnect the ke yboard cable 3 from the system board. Disconnec ting the K e yboar d Cable 9. Remov e the keyboard. Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the ke yboard. After the ke yboard is remo ved, the internal memory e xpansion board connector is accessible. Refer to the âMemory Expansion Boardâ section for instructions on removing the internal memory expansion board. 325388-002.book Page 17 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â18 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 1 0 Sw i t c h C ove r â The switch cov er is included in the Miscellaneous Plastics Kits, spare part number 350130-001 for HP Pa vilion zt3000 models, spare part number 338133-001 for HP Compaq nx7000 models, and spare part number 337009-001 for Compaq Presario X1000 models. 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. Remov e the keyboard (Section 5.9). 3. Insert a flat-bladed tool under the outside edges of the hinge cov er areas and lift up to disengage the left and right sides of the cov er from the notebook. 4. Remov e the switch cove r . R emo ving the S w itch C o v er Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the switch cov er . 325388-002.book Page 18 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â19 5. 1 1 S p e a ke r C ove r 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. Remov e the keyboard (Section 5.9). 3. Remov e the switch cov er (Section 5.10). 4. Disconnect the audio cable 1 from the system board. 5. Remov e the three PM2.5Ã5.0 screws 2 and the PM2.5Ã3.0 scre w 3 that secure the speaker cov er to the notebook. R emo ving the S peak er Co ver S cr e w s Spare P ar t Number Information Speaker co v er with cable F or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks F or use with HP Compaq nx7000 and Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks The speake r cov er cable is also included in the Miscellaneous Cab le Kit, spare par t number 336973-001. 350122-001 336973-001 325388-002.book Page 19 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â20 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. Lift the left side of the speaker co ver shield and swing it up and slightly to the right 1 . 7. Slide the speaker co ver back 2 to disengage it from the notebook. 8. Remov e the speaker cov er . R emo ving the S peak er Co ver Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the speaker co ver . 325388-002.book Page 20 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â21 5. 1 2 F a n 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. Remov e the keyboard (Section 5.9). 3. Remov e the switch cov er (Section 5.10). 4. Remov e the speaker cov er (Section 5.11). 5. Disconnect the fan cable 1 from the system board. 6. Remov e the PM2.5Ã5.0 screw 2 that secures the f an to the base enclosure. 7. Remov e the fan 3 . R emo ving the F an Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the fan. Spare P ar t Number Information F an 336993-001 The f an is also included with the heat sink, spare par t number 337000-001. 325388-002.book Page 21 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â2 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 1 3 H e a t S i n k 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3) and remov e the following components: â K eyboard (Section 5.9) â Switch cov er (Section 5.10) â Speaker co v er (Section 5.11) â Fan (Section 5.12) 2. Remov e the four PM2.0Ã9.0 spring-loaded shoulder scre ws 1 that secure the heat sink to the notebook. 3. Lift the front edge of the heat sink 2 and slide the heat sink out of the notebook at an angle 3 . R emo ving the Heat Sink Spare P ar t Number Information Heat sink with f an Ther mal pad 337000-001 337001-001 325388-002.book Page 22 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 3 â Carefully clean any thermal grease residue from the heat sink 1 and processor surfaces 2 each time you remo ve the heat sink. Apply ne w thermal grease to both surfaces. R emo v ing the Ther mal Gr ease F r om the Heat Sink and Proce sso r Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the heat sink. 325388-002.book Page 23 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â2 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 1 4 P r o c e s s o r 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3) and remov e the following components: â K eyboard (Section 5.9) â Switch cov er (Section 5.10) â Speaker co v er (Section 5.11) â Fan (Section 5.12) â Heat sink (Section 5.13) Spare P ar t Number Information Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.7-GHz Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.6-GHz Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.5-GHz Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.4-GHz Mobile Intel P entium 4 Processor-M, 1.3-GHz 345566-001 337011-001 337023-001 337024-001 337010-001 325388-002.book Page 24 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 5 2. Use a flat-bladed tool to turn the processor locking scre w 1 one-quarter turn counterclockwise. 3. Lift the processor straight up 2 and remo ve it. â Note that the gold triangle 3 should be in the lo wer right corner when installing the processor . R emo ving the Pr ocess or Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the processor . 325388-002.book Page 25 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â2 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 5 Di spla y Asse mbl y 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. Remov e the keyboard (Section 5.9). 3. Remov e the switch cov er (Section 5.10). Spare P ar t Number Information With carbonite and platinum b lue finish f or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks 15.4-inch, WUXGA 15.4-inch, WSXGA 15.4-inch, WXGA 350084-001 350127-001 350126-001 With carbon finish f or use wi th HP Compaq nx7000 notebooks 15.4-inch, WUXGA 15.4-inch, WSXGA 15.4-inch, WXGA 337006-001 337003-001 337008-001 With silv er finish f or use with Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks 15.4-inch, WUXGA 15.4-inch, WSXGA 15.4-inch, WXGA 337005-001 337004-001 337007-001 Displa y inv er ter (includes four displa y r ubber scre w cov ers) 336994-001 325388-002.book Page 26 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â2 7 4. Remov e the PM2.5Ã15.0 screw 1 that secures the display cable to the base enclosure. 5. Disconnect the display video cable 2 from the system board. Disconnec ting the Displa y Cable 325388-002.book Page 27 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â2 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. Close the notebook and turn the notebook upside do wn, with the rear panel facing you. 7. Remov e the following scre ws: â T wo PM2.5Ã9.5 scre ws 1 that secure the display assembly to the base enclosure through the bottom of hte top cov er â Three PM2.5Ã7.0 scre ws 2 that secure the display assembly to the base enclosure through the rear panel â One PM2.5Ã5.0 scre w 3 that secures the display assembly to the base enclosure through the rear panel R emo ving the Dis play S cr ew s 325388-002.book Page 28 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â29 8. T urn the notebook right-side up with the front facing you. 9. Open the display to the fully upright position. 10. Lift the display assembly straight up and remov e it. R emo ving the Dis play As sembl y Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the display assembly . 325388-002.book Page 29 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â30 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 1 6 T o p C ove r â When replacing the top cov er , de termine if a Bluetooth board is installed in the defecti ve top co ver . If a board is installed, remo ve it from the defecti ve top co ver and install it in the replacement top cov er . Refer to Section 5.17, âBluetooth Board, â for instructions on removing and installing a Bluetooth board. 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3). 2. Disconnect the wireless antenna cables from the Mini PCI communications board (Section 5.6). 3. Remov e the following components: â Optical dri ve (Section 5.8) â K eyboard (Section 5.9) â Switch cov er (Section 5.10) â Speaker co v er (Section 5.11) â Display assembly (Section 5.15) 4. T urn the notebook upside do wn, with the front facing you. Spare P ar t Number Information T op cov er (includes T ouchPad and T ouchP ad shield) F or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks F or use with HP Compaq nx7000 and Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks 350123-001 336983-001 325388-002.book Page 30 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â31 5. Remov e the following scre ws: â Three PM2.5Ã9.5 scre ws 1 along the front edge of the notebook â T wo PM2.5Ã5.0 scre ws 2 in the hard dri ve bay â Six PM2.5Ã15.0 scre ws 3 â One PM2.5Ã9.5 scre w 4 behind the hard dri ve bay R emo ving the T op Co ver S cr e w s 325388-002.book Page 31 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â3 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. T urn the notebook right-side up with the rear panel facing you. 7. Release the ZIF connector 1 to which the T ouchPad cable is attached and disconnect the T ouchPad cable 2 from the system board. 8. Route the two antenna cables 3 out of the hole in the system board. Disconnec ting the T ouc hP ad Cable and R outing the Wi r eles s Anten na Cab les 325388-002.book Page 32 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â33 9. If connected, disconnect the Bluetooth board cable 1 from the system board. 10. Disconnect the left 2 and right speaker cables 3 from the system board. Disconnec ting the Bluetooth W irele ss Module and Spe aker Cabl es 325388-002.book Page 33 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â3 4 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 11. Position the notebook so the front faces forw ard. 12. Remov e the following scre ws: â T wo PM2.5Ã7.0 scre ws 1 that secure the top cov er to the base enclosure â One PM2.0Ã3.0 scre w 2 that secures the top cov er and modem to the base enclosure â One PM2.5Ã5.0 scre w 3 that secures the top cov er to the base enclosure abov e the USB connector R emo ving the T op Co ver S cr e w s 325388-002.book Page 34 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â35 13. Lift the back edge of the top cov er 1 and swing it forward to disengage it from the base enclosure. 14. Remov e the top cover 2 . R emo ving the T op Co ver Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the top cov er . 325388-002.book Page 35 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â3 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 7 Bluetoot h Board 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3) and remov e the following components: â Mini PCI communications board (Section 5.6) â Optical dri ve (Section 5.8) â K eyboard (Section 5.9) â Switch cov er (Section 5.10) â Speaker co v er (Section 5.11) â Display assembly (Section 5.15) â T op cov er (Section 5.16) 2. T urn the top cov er right-side up with the T ouchPad facing you. Spare P ar t Number Information Bluetooth wireless communi cations board 338134-01 325388-002.book Page 36 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5 â3 7 3. Disconnect the Bluetooth board cable 1 from the Bluetooth board. â The Bluetooth board cable is included in the Miscellaneous Cable Kit, spare part number 336973-001. 4. Remov e the two PM1.5Ã3.0 scre ws 2 that secure the Bluetooth board to the top cov er . 5. Slide the Bluetooth board forward 3 , then lift it up 4 and remov e it from the top cov er . R emo ving the Bluet ooth Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the Bluetooth board. 325388-002.book Page 37 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â3 8 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 8 SD C ard Slot Board and Ca bl e 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3) and remov e the following components: â Mini PCI communications board (Section 5.6) â Optical dri ve (Section 5.8) â K eyboard (Section 5.9) â Switch cov er (Section 5.10) â Speaker co v er (Section 5.11) â Display assembly (Section 5.15) â T op cov er (Section 5.16) Spare P ar t Number Information SD Card slot board with cab le 336963-001 The SD Card slot board cable is also included in the Miscellaneous Cab le Kit, spare par t number 336973-001. 325388-002.book Page 38 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â3 9 2. Disconnect the SD Card slot board cable 1 from the system board. 3. Remov e the PM2.5Ã5.0 screw 2 that secures the SD Card slot board to the notebook. 4. Remov e the PM2.5Ã5.0 screw 3 that secures the SD Card slot board cable ground loop to the notebook. 5. Remov e the SD Card slot board and cable. R emo ving the SD C ar d Slot Boar d and Cable Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the SD Card slot board and cable. 325388-002.book Page 39 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â40 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5 . 1 9 V G A B oard and Shield 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3) and remov e the following components: â Mini PCI communications board (Section 5.6) â Optical dri ve (Section 5.8) â K eyboard (Section 5.9) â Switch cov er (Section 5.10) â Speaker co v er (Section 5.11) â Display assembly (Section 5.12) â T op cov er (Section 5.16) Spare P ar t Number Information V GA boards (include ther mal pads) F or use with HP P avilion zt3000 notebooks A TI MOBILITY RADEON 9200 with 64-MB video memor y A TI MOBILITY RADEON 9200 with 32-MB video memor y 350129-001 350128-001 F or use with HP Compaq nx7000 and Compaq Presario X1000 notebooks A TI MOBILITY RADEON 9200 with 64 -MB video memor y A TI MOBILITY RADEON 9200 with 32-MB video memor y A TI MOBILITY RADEON 7500c with 32-MB video memor y 336970-001 336969-001 336968-001 V GA board shield (includes ther mal pads) 337017-001 325388-002.book Page 40 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â41 2. Remov e the PM2.5Ã15.0 1 and PM2.0Ã3.0 2 scre ws that secure the VGA board shield to the base enclosure. 3. Lift the upper left corner of the VGA board 3 to disconnect it from the system board. 4. Remov e the VGA board and shield 4 . 5. Disengage the shield clips 5 to remov e the VGA board from the shield. R emo v ing the VG A Boar d and Shield 325388-002.book Page 41 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â4 2 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 6. The VGA shield thermal pad 1 and VGA board thermal pad 2 assist in cooling the notebook. Inspect these pads and replace if necessary each time the shield is remo ved. R eplac ing the Thermal P a ds on the V G A Board and Shi eld Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the VGA board and shield. 5 .2 0 Mode m a nd Cable 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3) and remov e the following components: â Mini PCI communications board (Section 5.6) â Optical dri ve (Section 5.8) â K eyboard (Section 5.9) â Switch cov er (Section 5.10) Spare P ar t Number Information Modem board with cab le 336999-001 The modem board cable is also included in the Miscellaneous Cable Kit, spare par t number 3361973-001. 325388-002.book Page 42 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â43 â Speaker co v er (Section 5.11) â Display assembly (Section 5.15) â T op cov er (Section 5.16) â VGA board and shield (Section 5.19) 2. Disconnect the modem cable 1 from the system board. 3. Lift the left side of the modem board 2 to disconnect it from the system board. 4. Remov e the modem board. R emo ving the Modem Boar d and Cable Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the modem and cable. 325388-002.book Page 43 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â44 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 5. 2 1 Sys t e m B o a r d â When replacing the system board, ensure that the follo wing components are remov ed from the defectiv e system board and installed on the replacement system board: â Memory expansion boards (Section 5.5) â Mini PCI communications board (Section 5.6) â R TC battery (Section 5.7) â Processor (Section 5.14) â VGA board and shield (Section 5.19) â Modem and modem cable (Section 5.20) 1. Prepare the notebook for disassembly (Section 5.3) and remov e the following components: â Optical dri ve (Section 5.8) â K eyboard (Section 5.9) â Switch cov er (Section 5.10) â Speaker co v er (Section 5.11) â Display assembly (Section 5.12) â T op cov er (Section 5.16) Spare P ar t Number Information System board (includes ther mal pads) PC Card assembly (remo val not documented) 336964-001 337014-001 325388-002.book Page 44 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
R emo val and Re placement Pr ocedur es Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 5â45 2. Disconnect the SD Card slot board cable 1 from the system board. 3. Remov e the PM2.5Ã5.0 screw 2 that secures the SD Card slot board cable ground loop to the base enclosure and the PM2.5Ã5.0 scre w 3 that secures the system board to the base enclosure. R emo v ing the S y stem Boar d Sc r e w s 325388-002.book Page 45 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
5â4 6 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Re mo val and R eplacement Pr ocedur es 4. Lift the right side of the system board approximately 1 inch 1 . If necessary , flex the back edge of the base enclosure out so that the parallel 2 and serial connectors 3 clear the base enclosure. 5. Slide the system board to the right at an angle 4 . 6. Remov e the system board. R emo ving the S y ste m Boar d Re v erse the abov e procedure to install the system board. 325388-002.book Page 46 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â1 6 Spec ific ations This chapter provides physical and performance specif ications. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Notebook Dimensions Height Width Depth 3.45 cm 25.40 cm 35.56 cm 1.4 in 10.0 in 14.0 in W eight (varies by configuration) 2.95 kg 6.5 lbs Stand-alone power requirements Nominal operating vo l t ag e A ver age operating power P eak operating po wer P ow er in Standby mode P ower in Hibernation mode 14.4 VDC 15.8 W 38.0 W < 800 mW < 100 mW Te m p e r a t u r e Operating (not writing optical) Operating (writing optical) Nonoperating 0°C to 35°C 5°C to 35°C -20°C to 60°C 32°F to 95°F 41°F to 95°F -4°F to 140°F 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
6â2 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating 10% to 90% 5% to 95%, 38.7°C (101 .6°F) maximum w et bu lb temperature Altitude (unpressurized) Operating (14.7 to 10.1 psia) Nonoperating (14.7 to 4.4 psia) -15.24 to 3,048 m -15.24 to 12,192 m -50 to 10,000 ft -50 to 40,000 ft Shoc k Operating Nonoperating 10 g, 11 ms, half-sine 175 g, 2 ms, half-sine â Applicable product safety standards specify thermal limits for plastic surfaces. The notebook operates well within this range of temperatures. Ta b l e 6 - 1 Notebook (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â3 Ta b l e 6 - 2 15.4-inch, Wide UXGA, TFT Displa y Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 20.7 cm 33.1 cm 39.1 cm 8.1 in 13.0 in 15.4 in Number of colors up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 300:1 Brightness 170 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.173 à 0.173 mm 1920 à 1200 RGB v er tical str ipe Bac klight Edge lit Character displa y 80 à 25 Viewing angle /- 55° horizontal, /- 45° v er tical typical 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
6â4 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s Ta b l e 6 - 3 15.4-inch, Wide SXGA , TFT Displa y Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 20.7 cm 33.1 cm 39.1 cm 8.1 in 13.0 in 15.4 in Number of colors up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 200:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.197 à 0.197 mm 1680 à 1050 RGB v er tical str ipe Bac klight Edge lit Character displa y 80 à 25 Viewing angle /- 65° horizontal, /- 50° v er tical typical 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â5 Ta b l e 6 - 4 15.4-inch, Wide XGA , TFT Displa y Dimensions Height Width Diagonal 20.7 cm 33.1 cm 39.1 cm 8.1 in 13.0 in 15.4 in Number of colors up to 16.8 million Contrast ratio 200:1 Brightness 180 nits typical Pixel resolution Pitch Fo r m a t Configuration 0.259 à 0.259 mm 1280 à 800 RGB v er tical str ipe Bac klight Edge lit Character displa y 80 à 25 Viewing angle /- 65° horizontal, /- 50° v er tical typical 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
6â6 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-5 Har d Drives 80-GB 60-GB (5400- rpm) 60-GB (4200- rpm) 40-GB User capacity per drive 1 80-GB 60-GB 40-GB 30-GB Dimensions Height Width We i g h t 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 102 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g 9.5 mm 70 mm 99 g Interface type ATA - 5 ATA - 5 ATA - 5 ATA - 5 T ransfer rate Synchronous (maximum) Security 100 MB/ sec A T A secur ity 100 MB/ sec A T A secur ity 100 MB/ sec A T A secur ity 100 MB/ sec A T A secur ity Seek times (typical read, including setting) Single trac k A ver age Maximum 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms 3 ms 13 ms 24 ms Logical bloc ks 2 156,301,488 117,210,240 78,140,160 58,605,120 Disk r otational speed 4200 r pm 5400 rpm 4200 r pm 4200 rpm Operating temperature 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) 5°C to 55°C (41°F to 131°F) 1 1 GB = 1,073,741,824 bytes . 2 Actual drive specifications ma y differ slightly . Cer tain restr ictions and e xclusions app ly . Consult the HP Customer Suppor t Center f or details. 325388-002.book Page 6 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â7 Ta b l e 6 - 6 External A C Adapter W eight .304 kg 0.67 lb P ower supply Rated input v oltage Rated input current Rated frequency 100 to 240 V AC RMS 1.7 A RMS 47 to 63 Hz Ta b l e 6 - 7 8-cell, Primary Li-Ion Batter y P ack Dimensions Height Width Depth We i g h t 13.4 cm 9.2 cm 1.9 cm .43 kg 5.25 in 3.63 in .75 in .96 lb Energ y Vo l t a g e Amp-hour capacity W att-hour capacity 14.8 V 4.4 aH 64 wH Te m p e r a t u r e Operating Nonoperating 0°C to 60°C -20°C to 60°C 32°F to 140°F -4°F to 104°F Rechar ge time System in off mode or Standb y System on (depending on system pow er consumption) 2 to 3 hours 2 to 5 hours 325388-002.book Page 7 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
6â8 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-8 24X D VD/CD-R W Drive Applicable disc D VD-5, D VD-9, D VD-10 CD-RO M (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F orm 1 and 2) CD-R (read only) CD Plus Photo CD (single/multisession) CD-Bridge Center hole diameter 1.5 cm 0.59 in Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm 8 cm 4.72 in 3.15 in Disc thickness 1.2 mm 0.047 in Tr a c k p i t c h 0.74 µm Access time Random Full stroke < 150 ms < 225 ms A udio output level Line-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 128 KB/s Data transfer rate CD-R (24X) CD-R W (10X) CD-ROM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 1500 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1352 KB/s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds 325388-002.book Page 8 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â9 T able 6-9 24X CD-R W Drive Applicable disc DV D - 5 , DV D - 9 , DV D - 1 0 CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F orm 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R (read only) CD Plus Photo CD (single/multisession) CD-Bridge Center hole diameter 1.5 cm 0.59 in Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm 8 cm 4.72 in 3.15 in Disc thickness 1.2 mm 0.047 in Tr a c k p i t c h 0.74 µm Access time Random Full stroke < 150 ms < 225 ms A udio output level Line-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 128 KB/s Data transfer rate CD-R (24X) CD-R W (10X) CD-ROM (24X) DV D ( 8 X ) Multiword DMA mode 2 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD r ate) 1500 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD r ate) 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD r ate) 10,800 KB/s (1352 KB/ s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 15 seconds Stop time < 6 seconds 325388-002.book Page 9 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
6â10 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-10 8X D VD-ROM Drive Applicable disc D VD-5, D VD-9, D VD-10 CD-R OM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R (read only) CD Plus Photo CD (single/multisession) CD-Bridge Center hole diameter 1.5 cm 0.59 in Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm 8 cm 4.72 in 3.15 in Disc thickness 1.2 mm 0.047 in Tr a c k p i t c h 0.74 µm Access time Random D VD media Full stroke D VD media Random CD media Full stroke CD media < 150 ms < 225 ms < 110 ms < 200 ms A udio output level Line-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 512 KB/s Data transfer rate Max 24X CD Max 8X D VD Multiword DMA mode 2 3600 KB/s (150 KB/s at 1X CD rate) 10,800 KB/s (1352 KB/ s at 1X D VD rate) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 10 seconds Stop time < 3 seconds 325388-002.book Page 10 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â11 T able 6-11 24X CD-R OM Drive Applicable disc DV D - 5 , DV D - 9 , DV D - 1 0 CD-ROM (Mode 1 and 2) CD Digital A udio CD-XA ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-I ready (Mode 2, F or m 1 and 2) CD-R (read only) CD Plus Photo CD (single/multisession) CD-Bridge Center hole diameter 1.5 cm 0.59 in Disc diameter Standard disc Mini disc 12 cm 8 cm 4.72 in 3.15 in Disc thickness 1.2 mm 0.047 in Tr a c k p i t c h 1.6 µm Access time Random Full stroke < 150 ms < 300 ms A udio output level Line-out, 0.7 Vr ms Cache b uffer 128 KB/s Data transfer rate Sustained (16X) Va r i a b l e Multiword DMA mode 2 2400 KB/s 1500 to 3600 KB/s (10X to 24X) 16.6 MB/s Star tup time < 8 seconds Stop time < 4 seconds 325388-002.book Page 11 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
6â12 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-12 System DMA Har dware DMA System Function DMA0 A vailab le for audio DMA1* Enter tainment audio (def ault; alter nate = DMA0, DMA3, none) DMA2* Disk ette drive DMA3 ECP parallel por t LPT1 (def ault; alter nate = DMA0, none) DMA4 DMA controller cascading (not av ailable) DMA5* A v ailab le f or PC Card DMA6 Not assigned DMA7 Not assigned *PC Card controller ca n use DMA 1, 2, or 5. 325388-002.book Page 12 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â13 T able 6-13 System Interrupts Har dware IRQ System Function IRQ0 System timer IRQ1 K eyboard controller IRQ2 Cascaded IRQ3 COM2 IRQ4 COM1 IRQ5 A udio (default)* IRQ6 Disk ette drive IRQ7 P arallel por t IRQ8 Real time cloc k (R TC) IRQ9 Infrared IRQ10 System use IRQ11 System use IRQ12 Inter nal pointing stick or e xter nal mouse IRQ13 Coprocessor (not av ailable to any peripheral) IRQ14 IDE interf ace (hard drive and optical drive) IRQ15 System use â PC Cards ma y asser t IRQ3, IR Q4, IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, IRQ11, or IRQ15. Either the in frared or the serial por t may asser t IRQ3 or IRQ4. *Def ault configuration; audio possib le configurations are IRQ5, IRQ7, IRQ9, IRQ10, or none. 325388-002.book Page 13 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
6â14 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s T able 6-14 System I/O Addresses I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 000 - 00F DMA controller no . 1 010 - 01F Unused 020 - 021 Interrupt controller no . 1 022 - 024 Opti chipset configuration registers 025 - 03F Unused 02E - 02F 87334 âSuper I/Oâ configuration f or CPU 040 - 05F Counter/t imer registers 044 - 05F Unused 060 K eyboard controller 061 P or t B 062 - 063 Unused 064 K eyboard controller 065 - 06F Unused 070 - 071 NMI enable/real time cloc k (RTC) 072 - 07F Unused 080 - 08F DMA page registers 090 - 091 Unused 092 P or t A 093 - 09F Unused 0A0 - 0A1 Interrupt controller no . 2 325388-002.book Page 14 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Spe cificat ion s Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide 6â15 I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 0A2 - 0BF Unused 0C0 - 0DF DMA controller no . 2 0E0 - 0EF Unused 0F0 - 0F1 Coprocessor busy clear/reset 0F2 - 0FF Unused 100 - 16F Unused 170 - 177 Secondar y fix ed disk controller 178 - 1EF Unused 1F0 - 1F7 Pr imar y fix ed disk controller 1F8 - 200 Unused 201 Jo ystick (decoded in ESS1688) 202 - 21F Unused 220 - 22F Enter tainment audio 230 - 26D Unused 26E - 26 Unused 278 - 27F Unused 280 - 2AB Unused 2A0 - 2A7 Unu sed 2A8 - 2E7 Unu sed 2E8 - 2EF Reser ved serial por t T able 6-14 System I/O Addresses (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 15 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
6â16 Maintenance and Serv ice Gui de Spe cificat ion s I/O Address (he x) System Function (shipping configuration) 2F0 - 2F7 Unused 2F8 - 2FF Infrared por t 300 - 31F Unused 320 - 36F Unused 370 - 377 Secondar y diskette driv e controller 378 - 37F P arallel por t (LPT1/def ault) 380 - 387 Unused 388 - 38B FM synthesizerâOPL3 38C - 3AF Unused 3B0 - 3BB V GA 3BC - 3BF Reser ved (parallel por t/no EPP suppor t) 3C0 - 3DF V GA 3E0 - 3E1 PC Card controller in CPU 3E2 - 3E3 Unu sed 3E8 - 3EF Inter nal modem 3F0 - 3F7 âAâ diskette controller 3F8 - 3FF Serial por t (COM1/def ault) CF8 - CFB PCI configuration inde x register (PCIDIV O-1) CFC - CFF PCI configuration data register (PCIDIV O-1) T able 6-14 System I/O Addresses (Continued) 325388-002.book Page 16 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ1 A Conn ec tor P in A ssi gnm ents Ta b l e A - 1 RJ-45 Netw ork Interface Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 T ransmit 5 Unused 2 T ransmit â 6 Receiv e â 3 Receiv e 7 Unused 4U n u s e d 8 U n u s e d 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 8 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Aâ2 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e A - 2 RJ-11 Modem Pin Signal Pin Signal 1U n u s e d 4 U n u s e d 2 Tip 5 Unused 3R i n g 6 U n u s e d Ta b l e A - 3 Universal Serial Bus Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 5 VDC 3 Data 2 Data â 4 Ground Ta b l e A - 4 S-Video Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Ground (Y) 3 Y -Luminance (Intensity) 2 Ground (C) 4 C-Chrominance (Color) 1 2 43 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ3 Ta b l e A - 5 External Monitor Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Red analog 9 5 VDC 2 Green analog 10 Ground 3 Blue analog 11 Monitor detect 4 Not connected 12 DDC 2B data 5 Ground 13 H orizontal sync 6 Ground analog 14 V er tical sync 7 Ground analog 15 DDC 2B cloc k 8 Ground analog 1 6 11 5 10 15 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Aâ4 Maint enance and Serv ice Gui de Connec tor P in Assignments Ta b l e A - 6 A udio Line-Out Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio out 2 Ground 2 1 Ta b l e A - 7 Micr ophone Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 A udio in 2 Ground 2 1 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Connec tor P in Assignments Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Aâ5 Ta b l e A - 8 P arallel Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 Strobe 14 Auto Linef eed 2 Data Bit 0 15 Error 3 Data Bit 1 16 Initialize Printer 4 Data Bit 2 17 Select In 5 Data Bit 3 18 Ground 6 Data Bit 4 19 Ground 7 Data Bit 5 20 Ground 8 Data Bit 6 21 Ground 9 Data Bit 7 22 Ground 10 Ackno wledge 23 Ground 11 Busy 24 Ground 12 P aper End 25 Ground 13 Select 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ1 B P o w er C ord Set Requirem ents 3-Con duc tor P o w er Cord Set The wide range input feature of the notebook permits it to operate from any line v oltage from 100 to 120 or 220 to 240 volts A C. The po wer cord set included with the notebook meets the requirements for use in the country where the equipment is purchased. Po wer cord sets for use in other countries must meet the requirements of the country where the notebook is used. For more information on po wer cord set requirements, contact an HP authorized reseller or service pro vider . Gen eral R equiremen ts The follo wing requirements are applicable to all countries: â The length of the po wer cord se t must be at least 1.5 meters (5 feet) and a maximum of 2 meters (6.50 feet). â All po wer cord sets must be approv ed by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for e v aluation in the country where the po wer cord set will be used. â The po wer cord set must ha ve a minimum current capacity of 10 amps and a nominal v oltage rating of 125 or 250 vo lts A C, as required by each countryâ s po wer system. â The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical conf iguration of an EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C13 connector for mating with the ap pliance inlet on the back of the notebook. 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Bâ2 Maint enance and Serv ic e Guide P o wer Cor d Set Requirements Coun tr y-Spec ific Requirements 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements Country Accredited Agency Applicable Note Number A ustralia EANSW 1 A ustria O VE 1 Belgium CEBC 1 Canada CSA 2 Denmark DEMK O 1 Finland FIMK O 1 Fr a n c e U T E 1 Ger many VDE 1 Italy IMQ 1 Jap a n ME T I 3 The Netherlands KEMA 1 Norwa y NEMK O 1 Sweden SEMK O 1 Switzerland SEV 1 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
P o wer Co rd Set R equirements Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Bâ3 United Kingdom BSI 1 United States UL 2 Notes 1. The fle xib le cord must be <HAR> T ype HO5VV -F , 3-conductor , 1.0 mm 2 conductor size . P ow er cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wall plug) must bear the cer tification mark of the agency responsible f or ev aluation in the countr y where it will be used. 2. The fle xib le cord must be T ype SPT -3 or equivalent, No . 18 A WG, 3-conductor . The wall plug m ust be a two-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler , fle xib le cord , and wall plug m ust bear a âTâ mark and registration number in accordance with the J apanese Dentor i Law . The fle xib le cord must be T ype VC T or VCTF , 3-conductor , 1.00 mm 2 conductor size . The wall plug m ust be a two-pole g rounding type with a J apanese Industri al Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration. 3-Conductor P ower Cor d Set Requirements (Continued) Country Accredited Agency Applicable Note Number 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ1 C Sc r e w Li sting This appendix provides specif ication and reference information for the scre ws used in the notebook. All screws listed in this appendix are a v ailable in the Miscellaneous Scre w Kit, spare part number 337012-001. 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Câ2 Mainten ance and Servi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã9 . 5 Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e C - 1 Phillips PM2.5Ã9.5 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 9.5 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo screws that secure th e hard drive to the notebook (documented in Section 5.3) 2 One screw that secures the optical drive to the notebook (documented in Section 5.8) 3 T wo screws that secure the di spla y assembly to the notebook (documented in Section 5.15) mm 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ3 Philli ps P M2 .5Ã7 .0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e C - 1 Phillips PM2.5Ã9.5 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 9 9.5 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: F our scre ws that secure the top cov er to the notebook (documented in Section 5.16) mm 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Câ4 Mainten ance and Servi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã7 .0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e C - 2 Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 5 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: Three screws that secure the displa y assembly to the notebook through the rear panel (documented in Section 5.15) mm 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ5 Philli ps P M2 .5Ã7 .0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e C - 2 Phillips PM2.5Ã7.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 5 7.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: T wo screws that secure the top co v er to the notebook (documented in Section 5.16) mm 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Câ6 Mainten ance and Servi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã3 .5 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e C - 3 Phillips PM2.5Ã3.5 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 3.5 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: F our scre ws that secure the hard driv e to the hard driv e cov er and shield (documented in Section 5.3) mm 325388-002.book Page 6 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ7 Philli ps P M2 .5Ã5 . 0 Scr ew Locations Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 One screw that secures the memory e xpansion compar tment cov er to the notebook (documented in Section 5.5) 2 One screw that secures the Mini PC I compar tment cov er to the notebook (documented in Section 5.6) mm 325388-002.book Page 7 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Câ8 Mainten ance and Servi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã5 . 0 Scr ew Locations Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 Three scre ws that secure the speaker cov er to the notebook (documented in Section 5.11) 2 One screw that secures the f an to the notebook (documented in Section 5.12) mm 325388-002.book Page 8 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ9 Philli ps P M2 .5Ã5 . 0 Scr ew Locations Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One screw that secures the displa y assembly to the notebook through the rear panel (documented in Section 5.15) mm 325388-002.book Page 9 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Câ10 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã5 . 0 Scr ew Locations Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: T wo screws that secure the top co v er to the notebook in the hard drive ba y (documented in Section 5.16) mm 325388-002.book Page 10 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ11 Philli ps P M2 .5Ã5 . 0 Scr ew Location Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One scre w that secures the top cov er to the notebook (documented in Section 5.16) mm 325388-002.book Page 11 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Câ12 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã5 . 0 Scr ew Locations Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: T wo screws that secure the SD Card slot board and cab le to the notebook (documented in Section 5.18) mm 325388-002.book Page 12 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ13 Philli ps P M2 .5Ã5 . 0 Scr ew Location Ta b l e C - 4 Phillips PM2.5Ã5.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 13 5.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One scre w that secures the sy stem board to the notebook (documented in Section 5.21) mm 325388-002.book Page 13 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Câ14 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã15 .0 Sc r e w Locations Ta b l e C - 5 Phillips PM2.5Ã15.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 10 15.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: 1 T wo screws that secure th e k eyboard to the notebook (documented in Section 5.9) 2 Six screws that secure the top co ver to the notebook (documented in Section 5.16) mm 325388-002.book Page 14 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ15 Philli ps P M2 .5Ã15 .0 Sc r e w Location Ta b l e C - 5 Phillips PM2.5Ã15.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 10 15.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One scre w that secures the displa y assembly cab le to the notebook (documented in Section 5.15) mm 325388-002.book Page 15 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Câ16 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 .5Ã15 .0 Sc r e w Location Ta b l e C - 5 Phillips PM2.5Ã15.0 Screw (Continued) Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 10 15.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One scre w that secures the V GA shield to the notebook (documented in Section 5.19) mm 325388-002.book Page 16 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ17 Phill ips P M 2 . 5 Ã3 . 0 Scr ew Location Ta b l e C - 6 Phillips PM2.5Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 1 3.0 mm 2.5 mm 5.0 mm Where used: One scre w that secures the speaker cov er to the notebook (documented in Section 5.11) mm 325388-002.book Page 17 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Câ18 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Philli ps P M2 . 0Ã3 . 0 Scr ew L ocat ions Ta b l e C - 7 Phillips PM2.0Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Black 2 3.0 mm 2.0 mm 4.0 mm Where used: 1 One screw that secures th e top cov er to the notebook (documented in Section 5.16) 2 One screw that secures the V GA shield to the notebook (documented in Section 5.19) mm 325388-002.book Page 18 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Scr e w Listin g Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Câ19 Phillips P M2 .0Ã9 .0 S pring-L oaded Scr ew L ocations Ta b l e C - 8 Phillips PM2.0Ã9.0 Spring-Loaded Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 4 9.0 mm 2.0 mm 6.0 mm Where used: F our scre ws that secure th e heat sink to the notebook (documented in Section 5.13) mm 325388-002.book Page 19 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Câ20 Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Scr ew Listin g Phillips P M1. 5Ã3 .0 S c r e w L ocations Ta b l e C - 9 Phillips PM1.5Ã3.0 Screw Color Qty . Length Thread Head Width Silv er 2 3.0 mm 1.5 mm 2.0 mm Where used: T wo screws that secure the Blue tooth board to the top co ver (documented in Section 5.17) mm 325388-002.book Page 20 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9: 21 AM
Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ1 In de x 1394 connector, location 1â29 802.11b wireless LAN, spare part numbers 3â9, 5â11 A AC adapter spare part number 3â15 specifications 6â7 applications key, location 1â31 audio line-out jack location 1â27 pin assignments Aâ4 audio troubleshooting 2â21 B base enclosure, spare part number 3â7 battery bay, location 1â35 battery pack removal 5â4 spare part number 3â9 specifications 6â7 battery pack release latch, location 1â35 Bluetooth wireless communications board removal 5â36 spare part number 3â5 , 3â9 , 5â11 , 5â36 bottom components 1â34 C cables, service considerations 4â2 caps lock light, location 1â33 CD-ROM drive removal 5â14 spare part number 5â14 specifications 6â11 CD-RW drive, specifications 6â9 components bottom 1â34 front 1â26 keyboard 1â30 left-side 1â26 rear panel 1â28 right-side 1â28 top 1â32 325388-002.book Page 1 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Inde xâ2 Mainte nance and Serv ice Gui de Inde x Computer Setup Advanced Menu 2â5 File Menu 2â3 overview 2â1 Security Menu 2â4 connector pin assignments audio line-out jack Aâ4 external monitor connector Aâ3 microphone jack Aâ4 modem jack Aâ2 monitor connector Aâ3 network jack Aâ1 RJ-11 telephone jack Aâ2 RJ-45 network jack Aâ1 S-Video connector Aâ2 Universal Serial Bus (USB) connector Aâ2 connectors, service considerations 4â2 cursor control keys, location 1â31 D design overview 1â36 Diagnostics for Windows 2â1 disassembly sequence chart 5â3 display assembly removal 5â26 spare part numbers 3â3, 5â26 specifications 6â3, 6â4, 6â5 display inverter, spare part number 3â3, 5â26 display lid switch, location 1â33 display release latch, location 1â27 DMA specifications 6â12 docking connector cover 3â10 docking connector, location 1â35 drives, preventing damage 4â3 DVD-ROM drive removal 5â14 spare part number 5â14 specifications 6â10 E electrostatic discharge 4â4, 4â7 external monitor connector location 1â29 pin assignments Aâ3 F F1 through F12 function keys, location 1â31 fan removal 5â21 spare part number 3â7 , 5â21 features 1â22 feet illustrated 3â10 locations 5â8 Fn key, location 1â31 front components 1â26 325388-002.book Page 2 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Inde x Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ3 G grounding equipment and methods 4â6 H hard drive OS loading problems 2â17 removal 5â6 spare part numbers 3â9, 3â14 , 5â6 specifications 6â6 hard drive bay, location 1â35 hard drive connector, illustrated 3â10 hard drive cover illustrated 3â10 removal 5â7 hard drive shield illustrated 3â10 removal 5â7 heat sink removal 5â22 spare part number 3â7, 5â22 I I/O address specifications 6â14 infrared port 1â28 internal keypad, location 1â31 interrupt specifications 6â13 K keyboard components 1â30 removal 5â15 spare part numbers 3â5, 5â15 troubleshooting 2â24 L left-side components 1â26 Logo Kit, spare part numbers 3â15 M mass storage devices, spare part numbers 3â14 memory expansion board removal 5â9 spare part numbers 3â9 memory expansion compartment cover illustrated 3â13 location 1â35 removal 5â9 microphone jack location 1â27 pin assignments Aâ4 Mini PCI communications board removal 5â11 spare part numbers 3â9, 5â11 325388-002.book Page 3 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Inde xâ4 Mainte nance and Serv ice Gui de Inde x Mini PCI compartment cover illustrated 3â13 location 1â35 removal 5â11 Miscellaneous Cable Kit components 3â5, 3â12 spare part number 3â5, 3â12 , 3â13 Miscellaneous Doors/Covers Kit components 3â9 spare part number 3â9 Miscellaneous Plastics Kit components 3â3, 3â10 spare part numbers 3â3, 3â11 models 1â2 modem cable 3â12, 3â13 jack, pin assignments Aâ2 removal 5â42 spare part number 3â9, 5â42 troubleshooting 2â26 monitor connector location 1â29 pin assignments Aâ3 mute button, location 1â33 N network jack, pin assignments Aâ1 network, troubleshooting 2â26 nonfunctioning device, troubleshooting 2â15, 2â23 notebook specifications 6â1 num lk key, location 1â31 num lock light, location 1â33 O operating system loading, troubleshooting 2â16 optical drive location 1â27 removal 5â14 spare part numbers 3â5, 3â14 , 5â14 P packing precautions 4â4 parallel connector location 1â29 pin assignments Aâ5 password, clearing 1â24 PC Card assembly, spare part number 3â7 PC Card eject button, location 1â27 PC Card slot, location 1â27 PC Card space saver 3â10 plastic parts 4â2 pointing device, troubleshooting 2â25 port replicator, troubleshooting 2â15 power button 1â32 power connector 1â28 power cord, spare part numbers 3â15, 3â16 power management features 1â25 325388-002.book Page 4 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Inde x Maintenance and S ervi ce Guide Inde xâ5 power, troubleshooting 2â9 processor removal 5â24 spare part numbers 3â7, 5â24 R rear panel components 1â28 removal preliminaries 4â1 procedures 5â1 replacement preliminaries 4â1 procedures 5â1 right-side components 1â28 RJ-11 telephone jack location 1â29 pin assignments Aâ2 RJ-45 network jack location 1â29 pin assignments Aâ1 RTC (real time clock) battery illustrated 3â13 removal 5â13 RTC (real time clock) battery cover illustrated 3â13 location 1â34 S Screw Kit, spare part number 3â16 SD Card slot board removal 5â38 spare part number 3â7, 5â38 SD Card slot board cable 3â12 , 3â13 SD Card slot, location 1â27 security cable slot, location 1â29 serial number 3â1, 5â2 service considerations 4â2 speaker cover removal 5â19 spare part numbers 3â5, 5â19 speaker cover cable 3â12, 3â13 speakers, location 1â32 specifications AC adapter 6â7 battery pack 6â7 CD-ROM drive 6â11 CD-RW drive 6â9 display 6â3, 6â4, 6â5 DMA 6â12 DVD-ROM drive 6â10 hard drive 6â6 I/O addresses 6â14 interrupts 6â13 notebook 6â1 static shielding materials 4â7 S-Video connector location 1â29 pin assignments Aâ2 switch cover illustrated 3â10 removal 5â18 325388-002.book Page 5 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM
Inde xâ6 Mainte nance and Serv ice Gui de Inde x system board removal 5â44 spare part number 3â7, 5â44 T thermal pad replacement 5â22 spare part number 3â7, 5â22 tools required 4â1 top components 1â32 top cover removal 5â30 spare part numbers 3â5, 5â30 TouchPad buttons, location 1â33 TouchPad light, location 1â33 TouchPad on/off button, location 1â33 TouchPad scroll zones, location 1â33 TouchPad, location 1â33 transporting precautions 4â4 troubleshooting audio 2â21 Computer Setup 2â2 flowcharts 2â7 keyboard 2â24 modem 2â26 network 2â26 nonfunctioning device 2â15 , 2â23 operating system loading 2â16 overview 2â1 pointing device 2â25 port replicator 2â15 power 2â9 video 2â13 U Universal Serial Bus (USB) connector location 1â29 pin assignments Aâ2 V vent, location 1â29, 1â34 VGA board removal 5â40 spare part numbers 3â7, 5â40 VGA board shield removal 5â40 spare part number 3â7 , 5â40 video troubleshooting 2â13 volume buttons, location 1â33 W Windows logo key, location 1â31 wireless antenna disconnection 5â12 spare part number 3â7 wireless device button, location 1â27 workstation precautions 4â5 325388-002.book Page 6 Frid ay, October 24, 2003 9:21 AM